JP7424699B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine typified by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine) and a reel game machine (slot machine).

Conventionally, some gaming machines require actual medals to play games (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-176415

In conventional gaming machines, the use of medals not only requires the clerk to count the medals, but also raises the issue of fraud, such as bringing in medals from other stores.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that does not use medals.

In order to solve the above problems, the game machine of the present invention includes:
operating means,
a game value number storage means for storing a game value number related to the game value used in the game;
a game value number control means that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means executes the process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is a possible means,
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a first time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, a first value can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of gaming values. ,
If the first time period has elapsed while the operating means remained in the predetermined operating state, the external processing repeats a second value larger than the first value as the number of gaming values at a predetermined cycle. can be sent to the device,
means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time period, which is longer than the first time period, elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state;
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined period as the number of gaming values;
The length of time obtained by subtracting the first time from the second time is at least three times the length of the first time.
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not use medals.

It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 seen from the front side (player side). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit. 4 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 3 and the reel unit 109 also shown in FIG. 3. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including a slot machine 100 and a lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 1. FIG. This is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. 7 is a diagram showing details of communication performed between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing details of hole control/fraud monitoring information, and (b) is a list of error codes. It is a table showing game control state commands. It is a table showing medal number control state commands. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. (a) is a diagram showing the details of the game control priority command, and (b) is a diagram showing the details of the response command returned from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. It is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command 2 is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. It is a flowchart showing the flow of game control section main processing. 16 is a flowchart of the medal insertion/start lever reception process (step S102) in FIG. 15. 17 is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG. 16. 18 is a flowchart of the payment button process (step S1102) in FIG. 17. It is a flowchart of the fluctuation information transmission process to the medal number control unit (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605) in FIGS. 17, 18, and 22. 20 is a flowchart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in FIG. 19. 21 is a flowchart of the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) in FIGS. 16 and 20. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 15. It is a flowchart showing the flow of game control unit timer interrupt processing. 24 is a flowchart of a disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 23. FIG. It is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. 23. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the medal number control part main processing. 28 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG. 27. It is a table showing the target range of RAM clear processing. It is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 28 etc. 28 is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. 27. 28 is a flowchart of gaming machine information notification transmission processing (step S304) in FIG. 27. 33 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. 32. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the counting notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG. 27. 28 is a flowchart of the rental notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 27. 28 is a flowchart of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG. 27. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of medal number control part timer interruption processing. 38 is a flowchart of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 37. 39 is a flowchart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 38. 38 is a flowchart of the scheduled counting number update process (step S405) in FIG. 37. FIG. It is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. 37. It is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. It is a flowchart (first half) of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 41. It is a flowchart (second half) of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 41. 45 is a flowchart of input command reception processing (step S4517) in FIG. 44. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the payment command reception process (step S4519) in FIG. 44. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG. 44. FIG. It is a flowchart of the game information setting process (step S4806, S4A19) in FIG. 47, FIG. 49. 45 is a flowchart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 44. FIG. It is a flowchart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG. 49. 45 is a flowchart of error command reception processing (step S4524) in FIG. 44. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 37. FIG. It is a flowchart of the medal number control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in FIG. 37. 38 is a flowchart of the display device display process (step S409) in FIG. 37. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a modification of the process during medal insertion in FIG. 17. 21 is a flowchart showing a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 20; 46 is a flowchart showing a modification of the submission command reception process of FIG. 45. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a modification of the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 40. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a modification of the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 40. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and (d) is a flowchart of command processing (step S307) in (a). (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows the 1st example when the count button 171 was operated. It is a timing chart showing a first example of performance when counting is being performed. This is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation is performed before operating the counting button 171 and the number of bets is not 0. It is a timing chart showing an example of a counting end effect. It is a timing chart showing an example when the payment button 134 is operated. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer. (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 67(c), and (b) is a timing chart showing a state where 30 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted in the example shown in FIG. 67(c). 2 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a case where a power outage occurs and then power is restored. 60 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted in FIG. 59. FIG. (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value, and (b) is a timing chart showing an example in which the automatic counting ends when the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value. 3 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where power is restored. It is a figure which shows the example of a display showing that automatic counting is in progress. It is a figure which shows the example of a sound output showing that automatic counting is in progress. 17 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the start of the operation of the count button 171. 74 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 73. FIG. 74 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 73. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170. 7 is a diagram showing an example of another change display on the game medal number display device 170. FIG. It is a diagram illustrating an example in which the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in addition to the game medal number display device 170. 79 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing another example completely different from the example shown in FIG. 78. FIG. (a) is a timing chart when a payout is attempted to be performed exceeding the payout threshold, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit exceedance error notification. (a) is a timing chart when payout is about to be performed exceeding the second threshold for payout, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit nearing notification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where a highly urgent error notification overlaps with a notification prompting counting. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after transitioning to the demonstration display, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an example notification after the counting button 171 is operated during the demonstration. . (a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a certain specified number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold and then falls below the specified number; , is a diagram showing an example of notification that prompts counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout over a plurality of games. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example in which a notification is issued to prompt counting every time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the counting button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player. FIG. 7C is a diagram showing an example, and (c) is a diagram showing an example where the counting button 171 is operated in a disadvantageous state to the player. (a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 86(b), (b) is a diagram showing an example in which counting that has been forcibly terminated is restarted, and (c) This is an example of the modified example explained using (a) and (b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state). It is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. It is a diagram showing a second modification example in which the operation differs depending on whether the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value. It is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. It is a diagram showing a change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is pressed for a long time. It is a figure showing an example of the performance performed according to the number of game medals. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance performed according to the number of acquired medals in an AT state. It is a figure showing an example of operation when an overflow of the number of game medals occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation|movement when the upper limit exceeded error of the number of game medals and the medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur simultaneously. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation when a medal number control unit disconnection error occurs. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation when a period for allowing the output of the sound is provided when outputting the counting sound for the counting process. 98(a) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 98(a). FIG. 98(b) is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 98(b).

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Basic embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that this embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information corresponding to the number of real medals (the number of virtual medals) is used without using actual medals. ``Number'' shall be used.

The slot machine described below starts to rotate when a predetermined number of game medals are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of the plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the process of paying out the number of game medals will be executed and the process will end. This is a game machine that runs a series of games that will end without executing the process of paying out the number of game medals if it is not.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 and the basic configuration of the lending machine 700 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Be prepared. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. The symbols displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 are the left reel upper symbols, the symbols displayed in the middle row of the left reel 110 are the left reel middle symbols, and the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 are the left reel lower symbols, the middle reel. The symbols displayed on the upper row of the middle reel 111 are the middle reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel 111 are the middle reel middle row symbols, the symbols displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 111 are the middle reel lower row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the right reel 112 are the middle reel upper row symbols. The symbols displayed on the upper row are called the right reel upper row symbols, the symbols displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 are called the right reel middle row symbols, and the symbols displayed on the lower row of the right reel 112 are called the right reel lower row symbols, and each reel 110 Three symbols of each of the symbols 112 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of 9 symbols. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Furthermore, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 includes three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this optical sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. The valid winning line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are 5 winning lines. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be activated, and if two medals are bet, an upper horizontal winning line and a lower horizontal winning line will be added. When the book is valid and three medals are bet, five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the right-up winning line become valid as winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to 5 lines, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the lower right horizontal winning line. Five lines, including the winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the winning line that becomes valid may be referred to as the valid line.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific prize winning combination (for example, a bonus prize, a special prize) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that this internally winning state has been carried over. This is a lamp to notify the player. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay combination that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a warning lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet button 130 or 132 is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed. When it is pressed once, one sheet is inserted, when it is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of 2 sheets) is inserted, and when it is pressed once again, an additional sheet (total of 3 sheets) is inserted. When the bet button 132 is pressed, three coins are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 130 may be referred to as a single bet button, and the bet button 132 may be referred to as a MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. Note that in the following, it may be expressed as being given to the player in the same sense as being paid out to the player. The game information display 126 and the payout number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the bet button 130 or 132 is operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is a stop operation for the left reel 110, the second stop operation is a stop operation for the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is a stop operation for the right reel 112 is referred to as a "sequential push operation order" or simply The stop operation in which the first stop operation is a stop operation of the right reel 112, the second stop operation is a stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is a stop operation of the left reel 110 is called a "reverse push". This is called ``order of operations'' or simply ``reverse push''. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The instruction monitor 125 is a display device for displaying information regarding the operation order (press order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. This instruction monitor 125 is also composed of a 7 segment (SEG) display. For example, when instructing to operate the left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, and right stop button 139 in this order, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125, and the left stop button 137, right stop button 139, middle stop button 139, When instructing to operate the stop buttons 138 in this order, "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125.

The settlement button 134 is a button for returning the inserted game medals (number of bets) to the number of medals control section 350. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

The game medal number display device 170 is a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, and is a device that displays the number of game medals recorded in the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG.

The counting button 171 is an operation means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG. 2 to the lending machine 700.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker 277 (see FIG. 2) provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160 for outputting sound from a speaker 272 (see FIG. 2) to the outside. This effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display) disposed on the back side of this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that this effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of effect means.

The lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 1 is sometimes referred to as a card unit, and corresponds to an example of the game medium management device of the present invention. This rental machine 700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 100.

Rental machine 700 accepts cards. There are two types of "cards" here. One is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) with a prepaid function, which is a gaming storage medium issued to general players who have not registered as members. The other type is a membership card, which is a gaming storage medium issued to a member player who has registered as a member at a gaming parlor. An IC card is used as the card.

A value is stored in the card. The value stored on the card includes the "number of medals held" and the "monetary balance" which is the balance of prepaid money.

The lending machine 700 that accepts the card has a function of converting the "number of medals held" stored on the card into the "number of game medals (number of credits)".

The "number of game medals (number of credits)" is data that can be used to set the number of bets and can be converted into the "number of medals held." The "number of game medals" can be obtained by withdrawing the "money balance" or "number of medals held" from the card. Furthermore, the "number of game medals" includes the number of medals obtained by winning. This "number of game medals" is managed by the number of medals control unit 350 shown in FIG. 2, and is the number of electronic medals (amount of electronic game value) stored electromagnetically. By performing the insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 and 132, the "number of game medals" is subtracted.

The "number of medals held" is a value obtained by converting the "number of game medals (number of credits)". This "number of medals held" is memorized so that it can be specified by the player's card. That is, by operating the counting button 171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of medals held", which can be stored on the card. Note that the "number of medals held" may be managed by a management device for managing the number of medals installed in the gaming hall.

The front side of the lending machine 700 is provided with a bill insertion slot 701 for inserting bills upward and a card insertion slot 702 for inserting a card below. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 is accepted by the card reader/writer, and the information stored on the card is read. The authenticity and type of banknotes inserted into the banknote insertion slot 701 are identified, and the face value of the banknote is stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as a "monetary balance."

An information display 703 is provided below the banknote insertion slot 701. The information display 703 is a display for providing operation guidance for the rental machine 700, the status of the slot machine 100, etc. in the form of text or images. Note that the surface may be configured as a touch panel, and various operations may be input by touching various displayed display items with a finger.

Below the information display 703, a money balance display 705 and a medal balance display 706 are arranged in two levels, upper and lower. The monetary balance display 705 displays the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as an amount. On the other hand, the "number of medals held" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 is displayed on the medal number balance display 706 as the number of medals.

A lending button 707 and a card return button 708 are provided in the vertical center of the lending machine 700. The lending button 707 is an operation means for performing an operation to obtain the "number of game medals" by withdrawing the "monetary balance" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702. Specifically, if the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "monetary balance", the LED lamp built into the lending button 707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the lending button 707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is added according to the amount of money withdrawn. For example, the "number of game medals" equivalent to 1000 yen is added as the predetermined amount. Further, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than a predetermined amount (for example, less than 1000 yen), only the "number of game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate is added. Furthermore, even if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the "number of game medals" for the predetermined amount can be added by replenishing it from the "number of medals you have" stored on the card. good. The card return button 708 is operated by the player when the player ends the game, and is an operation means for storing the "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game on the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 and ejecting the card. It is. The "number of medals you have" determined at the end of the game is calculated by subtracting the number of medals converted to "number of game medals" from the "number of medals you have" stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702. The number of medals is the sum of the number of game medals counted by the operation.

The data of "money balance", "number of medals held", and "number of game medals" explained above are arranged in the following order: "money balance" and "number of medals held" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals held" It will be converted. In this way, the "number of medals held" specified by the card is converted into the "number of game medals", and in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the number of bets can be set using the "number of game medals". This may confuse players who are accustomed to traditional slot machines, where you are lent real medals, insert the real medals to secure credits, and use those credits to set the number of bets. It is possible to provide a game using a new slot machine (managed gaming machine) that does not use real medals, without giving away any coins.

Note that although the "number of stored medals" is not mentioned in this specification, the "number of stored medals" is the number of medals that are not stored in the card but deposited at the gaming parlor. At the gaming parlor, the number of medals a player has acquired through games is managed as "scores" during the day using the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. It may also be managed as a number. If both the "number of stored medals" and the "number of medals held" are stored, the "number of medals held" is preferentially debited. Further, both the "number of medals held" and the "number of stored medals" may be stored in a host server (intermediate management terminal 810 or management server 820 shown in FIG. 5) in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, the "number of medals held" is directly stored in the visitor card, but the "number of medals held" may be stored in the host server in correspondence with the card number. When storing the card number in correspondence with the card number in the host server, data that can identify the time stored in the host server may be written on the card (membership card, visitor card) and discharged. In addition, the "monetary balance" is written directly on the card (membership card, visitor card) and discharged. The timing at which the "number of medals held" is stored in the card (membership card, visitor card) or host server is, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is operated and counting processing is performed. However, instead of this, the information may be stored all at once when the card is returned. Furthermore, when the player finishes playing the game and returns the card from the lending machine 700, the "number of medals held" stored in the lending machine 700 is temporarily stored in the hall management terminal 800 as stored medals. When the player inserts the card into the same or another lending machine 700 again on the same day as the day on which the card was returned, only the "number of medals held" for that day, which was once stored as stored medals, will be transferred to the lending machine again. 700, and the "number of game medals" may be added within the range of the "number of medals held" so that the game can be played.

Furthermore, the rental machine 700 may be provided with an IR photosensitive unit that receives an infrared signal from a remote control carried by an attendant at the game parlor, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal.

Furthermore, in the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. The "number of medals held" may be debited and converted into the "number of game medals". Specifically, the lending machine 700 is provided with a medal button, and when the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 has a "number of medals", an LED lamp built into the medal button can be pulled out. It lights up in a manner that represents. By operating the held medal button in this state, if the number of held medals is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 50 pieces), a predetermined number (for example, 50 pieces) of the "number of game medals" is added. In addition, the number of medals that a player has earned through playing, as described above, can be stored on the card as "scores" during the day, or can be managed by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. 700 is provided with a replay button. If there is a "point", the LED lamp built into the replay button lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the replay button in this state, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of "game medals" may be added.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 2. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to check the program, and the security deteriorates, such as becoming a breeding ground for unauthorized modification. There are limits to the data capacity of the RAM 308.

《Main control section》
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game, and a medal number control unit 350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control section 302 corresponds to an example of a game control means, and the medal number control section 350 corresponds to an example of a game value number control means. The game control unit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, reel symbol arrangement, stop position, etc., and a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) not shown. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to the medal number control section 350, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the game control section 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit (not shown) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator (not shown), and when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 controls the game when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit. (Starts main control section main processing, which will be described later).

Further, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 monitors the states of each bet button 130, 132, start lever 135, each stop button 137 to 139, and settlement button 134 at each interrupt time. For example, when it is detected that the bet buttons 130 and 132 have been turned on, a process is executed in which the medals electronically stored in the medal number control unit 350 are electronically inserted into the game as medals. When it is detected that the start lever 135 has been turned on, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit. The random number generation circuit that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used in the lottery. When it is detected that the left stop button 137, middle stop button 138, or right stop button 139 is turned on, if the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to each stop button are in a stopable state, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Execute control. If it is detected that the settlement button 134 has been turned on, a process of returning the electronically inserted game medals to the medal number control unit 350 is executed.

In addition, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 also monitors the status of various sensors 318 (optical sensor for the left reel 110, optical sensor for the middle reel 111, optical sensor for the right reel 112, etc.) at each interrupt time. ing. The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112. Each time a piece passes, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 drives display devices such as a drive circuit 322 that drives motors 110m to 112m (see FIG. 3) provided on the reels 110 to 112, an instruction monitor 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127. A drive circuit 324 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, etc.). We are prepared.

Further, in the slot machine 100, setting values are set that give different degrees of advantage to the player. Settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage. Specifically, an internal winning probability is determined for each set value. A setting change button 175 that is operated when changing this setting value is connected to the game control section 302.

Further, an information output circuit 328 is connected to the game control section 302, and the main control section 300 inputs an information input circuit provided in an external hall computer 600 (see FIG. 5) etc. via this information output circuit 328. 650, game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game status) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to each of the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

Like the game control unit 302, the medal number control unit 350 also includes a CPU 354, a ROM 356, a RAM 358, an I/O 360 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. Equipped with timer 362. The CPU 304 and the CPU 354 are provided on the same board and are connected via a buffer IC. This allows the CPU 304 to use the ROM 306 and RAM 308 but not the ROM 356 and RAM 358, and causes the CPU 354 to use the ROM 356 and RAM 358 but not the ROM 306 and RAM 308. Note that a WDT (watchdog timer), which is not shown, is also installed. Further, the CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 also operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted from a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 354 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 356 to the counter timer 362, and the counter timer 362 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. The interrupt request is determined and an interrupt request is sent to the CPU 354 at each interrupt time. The CPU 354 operates in response to this interrupt request. The medal number control unit 350 executes an interrupt process (medal number control unit timer interrupt process to be described later) at 0.745 ms. Furthermore, communication with the rental machine 700 is repeated at a cycle of 300 ms.

The CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 also includes a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input from the circuit, control of the number of medals is started (starting the main processing of the number of medals control unit, which will be described later).

Connected to the basic circuit of the medal number control unit 350 are a game medal number display device 170 composed of a five-digit seven-segment (SEG) display, a counting button 171, and a game medal number clear button 172.

Further, a lending machine 700 is also connected to the basic circuit of the medal number control section 350 via a lending machine connecting terminal board 790. The medal number control unit 350 performs bidirectional communication with the lending machine 700.

The medal number control section 350 transmits various commands to the game control section 302. Further, the game control section 302 also transmits various commands to the medal number control section 350. That is, the communication between the medal number control section 350 and the game control section 302 is also bidirectional communication.

Further, the medal number control unit 350 stores the “number of game medals” in a predetermined area of the RAM 358. Specifically, the "number of game medals" is stored in the credit counter. The medal number control unit 350 updates the "number of game medals" stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 358 by addition processing or subtraction processing. The addition process includes a process based on a payout command sent from the game control unit 302, a process based on a settlement command sent from the game control unit 302, and a process based on a lending notice sent from the lending machine 700. can be given. On the other hand, examples of the subtraction processing include counting processing based on the operation of the counting button 171 and processing based on the input command transmitted from the game control section 302.

Note that the game medal count clear button 172 shown in FIG. This is an operation means for clearing the "number of game medals" stored in the . For example, if a player leaves the game with ``2'' remaining in the number of game medals, it becomes difficult to judge whether the player who left ``2'' intends to continue playing or not, and another player Although the game cannot be started, if the number of game medals can be cleared by the operation of the clerk, another player can be welcomed early. Note that when the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, the "number of game medals" is not necessarily cleared; for example, it is cleared when the number of game medals is 2 or less, and when it is 3 or more. , counting may be performed in the same way as when the counting button 171 is operated. If the counting button 171 is malfunctioning or the like and it cannot be recognized that the counting button 171 has been operated, it may not be possible to convert the "number of game medals" to the "number of medals held", which may put the player at a disadvantage. However, if counting can be performed by the store clerk's operation, the player will not be disadvantaged. Furthermore, since there is no need to newly provide a counting button for the clerk, there is no increase in costs. Note that clearing and counting may not be separated by determining the number of game medals, but may be separated into clearing and counting depending on the operating method of the number of game medals clear button 172. For example, if the button is pressed for a short time, it is cleared, and if the button is pressed for a long time, it is counted. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals. Further, when only the number of game medals clear button 172 is operated, the count is cleared, and when the number of game medals clear button 172 and other buttons are operated at the same time, it is counted. The possibility of making a mistake in operation is low, and it is easy to select between clearing and counting.

《Sub-control unit》
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 (gaming control unit 302) via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling backlight lighting patterns, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277. Note that these speakers 272 and 277 correspond to an example of presentation means.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, (reel backlight, etc.) is connected. Note that the various lamps 420 correspond to an example of presentation means.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effect (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163), and a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157. ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

Next, an example of the connection between each board such as the power supply control board, the main control part board, and the first sub-control part board, and each unit such as the reel unit and the production movable body unit will be explained.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of connection between each board and each unit.

This FIG. 3 shows a power control board 252B, a main control board 300B, a first sub-control board 400B, a reel unit 109, and a production movable body unit 160U. The effect movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163, which is incorporated in the effect device 160 shown in FIG. The shutter 163 corresponds to an example of a movable body.

A plurality of connectors PC1 to PC4, MC2 to MC6, and SC1 to SC4 are shown on each of the power supply control board 252B, the main control unit board 300B, and the first sub-control unit board 400B. Further, one or more connectors RC1 to RC3 and DC1 are also shown on each of the reel unit 109 and the effect movable body unit 160U.

In the island equipment installed in the gaming machine installation business, the 100V AC power source is stepped down to 24V, and the 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100 through the power cord 265 connected to the connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted into a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage, and a 5V DC voltage in the power supply control board 252B. Although it may be converted to other DC voltages, in the description here, 24V DC voltage and 5V DC voltage will be explained.

The power control board 252B shown in FIG. 3 shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line, and a power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power line are connected to the 5V power line. Also shown are a power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and a power control 5V capacitor 5PC. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Also shown is a power switch 244.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to the connector PC2 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC2 and the connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and the main control board 300B is supplied with a 24V DC current and also a 5V DC current through the harness PM. .

Further, a 24V power line is connected to the connector PC3 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC3 and the connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and a 24V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1. Further, a 5V power line is connected to the connector PC4 of the power control board 252B. This connector PC4 and the connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and a 5V DC current is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2.

Note that 24V and 5V may be supplied to the main control board 300B using separate harnesses, similarly to the first sub-control board 400B. Furthermore, 24V and 5V may be supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through a common harness, similarly to the main control board 300B.

The main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 3 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current also supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power line of the main control board 300B. . Further, the main control unit board 300B shown in FIG. 3 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power supply line. ing. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is a power supply monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power supply line.

Further, a reel motor drive IC 322i is mounted on the main control board 300B. The reel motor drive IC 322i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 322 shown in FIG. The reel motor drive IC 322i is also supplied with a 24V DC current and a 5V DC current. Although not shown, the main control board 300B includes the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG. 2, and also includes integrated circuits constituting other drive circuits 324, 326, etc. ing.

Furthermore, the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B, which is connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR1, and the connector MC3, which is also connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the reel unit. The connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected by a harness MR2, and the connector MC4, which is also connected to the reel motor drive IC 322i, and the connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 are connected by a harness MR3. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the reel motor drive IC 322i are respectively supplied to the reel unit 109 through these harnesses MR1 to MR3, and each motor 110m to 112m provided for each reel is connected to the reel unit 109. It becomes possible to drive. Further, control signals (commands) for controlling the motors 110m to 112m are sent from the main control board 300B through the harnesses MR1 to MR3, respectively. Although a harness is connected to each motor, connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 109 side are made into one connector, connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side are also made into one connector, and one common harness is used. You can also connect with However, although it is called one common harness, it is a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for command transmission), and is not used for current supply.

The first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 3 also shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B, and a 5V DC current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power line of the first sub-control unit board 400B. Current flows. Further, the first sub-control unit board 400B shown in FIG. 3 also includes a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power supply line. It is shown. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is a power monitoring LED lamp that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. This is an LED lamp for monitoring the power supply. Note that, also in the first sub-control board 400B, no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line.

Furthermore, a movable body motor drive IC 424i is mounted on the first sub-control board 400B. This movable body motor drive IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the drive circuit 424 shown in FIG. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are each supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i. Although not shown here, the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 2 is configured on the first sub-control board 400B, and integrated circuits that configure other drive circuits 424, 426, etc. are also mounted thereon.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the performance movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current that were supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are each supplied to the performance movable body unit 160U through this harness SD, and the motor 163m provided in the performance movable body unit 160U is driven. It becomes possible. Further, a control signal (command) for controlling the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD.

Note that the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 also includes a second sub-control unit 500 as shown in FIG. 2, and although not shown in FIG. A 24V DC current and a 5V DC current are each supplied through the illustrated harness. Further, the second sub-control board is connected to the first sub-control board 400B by a harness for control signals (for command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the effect device (effect image display device 157) in the same way as the first sub-control board 400B.

As explained above, the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are electrically connected by the harnesses MR1 to MR3. Further, the first sub-control board 400B and the effect movable body unit 160U are electrically connected by a harness SD.

Here, based on the above configuration, the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in a power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually rotated will be described. Note that the power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is turned off, or a state in which the power switch 244 is turned on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet. Alternatively, it may be a state in which power is not being supplied from the island equipment (the same applies below). If power is not being supplied from the island equipment, even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on, the power is off. Even in such a power outage state, each reel 110 to 112 can be manually rotated in either the forward direction or the reverse direction.

Which of the monitor LEDs shown in Fig. 3 (power control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL) lights up when the power is on. ) is also off when the power is off.

However, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 110m (see FIG. 3) that rotates the left reel 110. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 3, the induced current generated in the motor 110m flows into the main control board 300B through the harness MR1, and is supplied from the reel drive IC 322i to the 24V power line and the 5V power line, respectively. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and the ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, so it is lit by an induced current, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML has its resistance value adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues to be lit for a while because the main control 24V capacitor 24MC is provided in the 24V power supply line. On the other hand, since no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped. That is, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. Note that a capacitor having a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may be provided in the 5V power supply line as well.

The induced current that has flowed into the main control board 300B then flows into the power control board 252B through the harness PM, and is supplied to each of the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector PC2. A power control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the ground, and a power control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the ground. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by an induced current, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light. Further, even if the manual rotation is stopped, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL continues to be lit for a while because the power control 24V capacitor 24PC is provided in the 24V power supply line. Further, since the power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC is also provided on the 5V power supply line, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL also continues to be lit for a while.

The induced current that has flowed into the power supply control board 252B further flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1, and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector SC1. A sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, so that it is turned on by an induced current. Further, the induced current flowing into the power supply control board 252B flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2, and is supplied to the 5V power supply line from the connector SC2. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and the ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by an induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B emit light. There will be. Note that even if the manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24-V monitor LED 24SL continues to be lit for a while because the sub-control 24-V capacitor 24SC is provided in the 24-V power supply line. On the other hand, since no capacitor is provided in the 5V power supply line, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL immediately turns off when the manual rotation is stopped.

The above description explains the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses MR1, PM, PS1, and PS2 is normally connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, if harness MR1 is disconnected or not properly connected to connector RC1 and/or connector MC2 (disconnected or insufficiently inserted), no matter how much the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the None of the monitor LEDs shown in No. 3 is lit, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML remain off. As a result, even if you manually rotate the left reel 110, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. I suspect a poor connection.

In addition, if the harness PM is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML lights up, but the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL do not light up. As a result, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, although the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are lit, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED 24PL and If the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL is not lit, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B are turned on by manually rotating the left reel 110. It is possible.

Furthermore, if the harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 24V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 24SL does not light up. As a result, if only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 does not light up even when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, we suspect that there is an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors PC3 and SC1. Can be done. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, the sub control 5V of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only monitor LED 5SL does not light up. As a result, even if the left reel 110 is rotated manually, if only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. Can be done.

Here, the explanation is for the case where the left reel 110 is manually rotated in a power outage state, but the case where the middle reel 111 is manually rotated in a power outage state is also explained, and the right reel 112 is manually rotated in a power outage state. The same applies when rotating. Furthermore, as the number of manually rotated reels increases, the monitor LED lights up brighter. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are manually rotated at the same time, the monitor LED emits brighter light than when only the left reel 110 is manually rotated.

In addition, there are LEDs used for purposes other than monitor LEDs, such as main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL, sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL. For example, even if it is an error monitoring LED that emits light when an error occurs, or a signal monitoring LED, etc.), if it is installed with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, it can be manually operated in a power outage state. When the left reel 110 is rotated, it emits light if there is no electrical connection failure. Therefore, even if the LED is used for a different purpose than the monitor LED, it is possible to check for an electrical connection failure.

Furthermore, even in a power outage state, the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 1 can be manually opened and closed.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, a current (induced current) due to a back electromotive force is generated in the motor 163m (see FIG. 3) that opens and closes the shutter 163. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 3, the induced current generated in the motor 163m flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness SD, and is supplied to the 24V power line and 5V power line from the movable motor drive IC 424i, respectively. be done. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, so it lights up due to an induced current, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL also has its resistance value adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current.

The induced current that has flowed into the first sub-control board 400B then flows into the power control board 252B through the harness PS1, and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector PC3. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is turned on by an induced current. Further, the induced current flowing into the first sub-control board 400B also passes through the harness PS2, flows into the power control board 252B, and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector PC4. The power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also turned on by an induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of a plurality of boards, such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light.

The induced current flowing into the power control board 252B further flows into the main control board 300B through the harness PM, and is supplied to each of the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector MC5. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, so that it is lit by an induced current, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL has its resistance value adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. The lamp lights up due to the induced current. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B emit light. There will be.

The above explanation explains the phenomenon that occurs when each of the harnesses SD, PS1, PS2, and PM is normally connected to the connector and there is no disconnection. On the other hand, if the harness SD is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector DC1 and/or the connector SC3, no matter how much you manually open and close the shutter 163, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 will light up. , the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL remain off. As a result, even if you manually open and close the shutter 163, if any of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. I suspect a poor connection.

In addition, if harness PS1 is disconnected or not properly connected to connector SC1 and/or connector PC3, when shutter 163 is manually opened/closed, sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be Although they light up, the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is disconnected or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will be Although they light up, the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL are lit, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML are not lit. , an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

Furthermore, even if the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, by manually opening and closing the shutter 163, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be ) can be lit.

Furthermore, if the harness PM is disconnected or not properly connected to connector PC2 and/or connector MC5, when the shutter 163 is manually opened or closed, the main control 24V monitor of the monitor LED shown in FIG. Only LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. I suspect a poor connection.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 3 and the reel unit 109 also shown in FIG. 3. Hereinafter, points different from the connection example explained using FIG. 3 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

In FIG. 4, connector MC5 and connector MC6 provided on main control unit board 300B are omitted from illustration. A reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control unit board 300B and the reel unit 109 shown in FIG.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 is connected. Furthermore, a connector RRM3 to which a harness MR31 connected to a connector MC4 of the main control board 300B is connected, and a connector RRR3 to which a harness MR32 connected to a connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 is connected are also provided.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 4 as well, when the reels 110 to 112 are manually rotated in a power-off state, monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML light up if they are normal. However, if the plurality of harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are disconnected or not connected properly, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and Monitor LEDs such as main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 4, since the reel relay board 902B is provided, the number of harnesses and the number of connectors are increased compared to the connection example shown in FIG. 3, so electrical connection defects may occur. It has become more sexual. However, an induced current is generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and a defective electrical connection can be easily confirmed from the lighting state of the monitor LED.

Note that the reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. A defective electrical connection can be confirmed by generating an induced current by manual operation in a power-off state, and by lighting up these monitor LEDs if normal.

In the description here, the left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112, and shutter 163 have been described as movable bodies, but the present invention is not limited to these, and any movable body driven by a motor may be used.

Furthermore, instead of the LED lamp that is turned on by induced current in a power-off state, a light emitting means such as a 7 segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a 7-segment display that displays setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) that give different degrees of advantage to the player. The light emitting means must be visible. Note that these light emitting means do not move even when driven by the motor. This is because the light emitting means is not provided on the movable body that is driven by the motor, but is provided on the fixed substrate.

In the above explanation, adjustment resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) were used to cause the monitor LED to emit light using an induced current in a power-off state, but means that can adjust the impedance may also be used. That's fine, and it's not limited to adjustable resistance. However, if a large amount of induced current flows even when the power is on, it will cause problems, so instead of adjusting the impedance just to make it easier for the induced current to flow when the power is off, the impedance should also be adjusted in consideration of what happens when the current is on. need to be adjusted.

Note that the configuration described above is
A light emitting means;
A game machine comprising: a movable body unit having a movable body movable by driving a motor;
The motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness,
The light-emitting means may emit light by manually operating the movable body to drive the motor in a power-off state and receiving a current due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor,
The light emitting means corresponds to an example of a game machine characterized in that it does not move even when the motor is driven.

FIG. 5 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 1.

As shown in FIG. 5, the gaming system S includes the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the lending machine 700 also shown in FIG. 1, a hall computer 600, a hall management terminal 800, an intermediate management terminal 810, and a management server 820. Note that the rental machine 700, the hall computer 600, and the hall management terminal 800 are collectively referred to as an external processing device. One of the features of this external processing device is that it is equipped with storage means.

The hall management terminal 800 is a computer different from the hall computer 600, is installed in each gaming hall (hall) H1, H2, and is connected to the rental machine 700. Since the lending machine 700 is connected to the slot machine 100, the hall management terminal 800 is connected to the slot machine 100 via the lending machine 700. Information regarding the number of medals exchanged between the lending machine 700 and the slot machine 100 (count information, lending information), the operating state of the slot machine 100, and other information are input to the hall management terminal 800. The hall management terminal 800 records and manages the input information.

The management server 820 is provided to comprehensively manage the gaming system 1, and provides information regarding the slot machine 100 and lending machine 700, such as information identifying the slot machine 100 and information identifying the lending machine 700 (gaming machine installation information) and manages this information. Furthermore, the management server 820 is connected to the hall management terminals 800 of many stores via the intermediate management terminal 810, and receives information obtained by communicating with the hall management terminals 800, such as information regarding the number of medals and slot management terminals. Information such as the operating status of the machine 100 is also managed.

《Communication sequence and communication contents》
Commands are exchanged between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350. The game control unit 302 transmits a game control unit command (game control status command, game control priority command) to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms. On the other hand, the medal number control unit 350 transmits a medal number control command (medal number control state command, response command) to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms. In addition, in the game control unit 302, the game control priority command is transmitted with priority over the game control state command. Further, in the medal number control unit 350, a response command corresponding to the game control priority command is transmitted with priority over the medal number control state command.

In the communication between the game control unit 302 and the number of medals control unit 350 and the communication between the number of medals control unit 350 and the lending machine 700, gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information are transmitted and received. Ru.

FIG. 6 is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 6(a) includes three types of status information: advantageous status information, setting status information, and front door status information. The advantageous state information includes information indicating whether or not the bonus operation state is equivalent to RB (RB information), information indicating whether the bonus operation state is equivalent to BB (BB information), and bonus operation state equivalent to AT (assist time). It is composed of information (AT information) indicating whether or not the AT information is present. The setting status information includes information indicating whether the setting is being changed by operating the setting button 175 shown in FIG. 2 (setting changing information), and information indicating whether the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation information). The front door status information is information indicating whether the front door 102 is in an open state (door open information). The AT state is a gaming state in which auxiliary functions are activated to help the player obtain advantageous results, such as notifying the stop operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and notifying the symbols to be aimed at and stopped.

The gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 6(b) includes total number of coins inserted, total number of coins paid out, MY counter value information, total number of coins paid out for accessory objects, total number of consecutive prizes paid out, information on number of games played, and role ratio. Contains monitor information. The total number of inserted medals information is information representing the number of inserted medals accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replays is not included. The total number of medals to be paid out information is information representing the number of medals to be paid out that has been accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that the number of medals for replays is not included. The MY counter value information is information representing the maximum value of the MY counter calculated after the power was turned on. The slot machine 100 has a state in which notification of the stop operation order for internally won combinations is executed, and the MY counter is a counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals after entering this state. The information on the total number of medals to be paid out for accessory objects is information representing the number of medals to be paid out due to the operation of the accessory object accumulated since the power was turned on. The information on the total number of medals to be paid out as a continuous accessory is information representing the number of medals to be paid out due to the operation of the RB, which has been accumulated since the power was turned on. The number of games information is information representing the number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. The role ratio monitor information is information representing various ratios (role object ratio, continuous role object ratio, advantageous section ratio, instructional role object ratio, role object condition ratio) for evaluating the degree of gambling of the gaming machine. become.

The gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 6(c) includes two pieces of information: game control section information and medal number control section information. The game control unit information is composed of ID number information of the IC chip of the game control unit 302, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip. The medal number control unit information includes ID number information of the IC chip of the medal number control unit 350, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

FIG. 7 shows, from the left, a first sub-control unit 400, a game control unit 302, a medal number control unit 350, and a lending machine 700.

First, before explaining the game control state command, communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 will be explained. A medal number control section 350 is connected to the lending machine 700, and communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is performed between the medal number control section 350 and the lending machine 700. Communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700 is performed at a cycle of 300 ms.

As shown in FIG. 7, a gaming machine information notification and a counting notification are transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. Further, a lending notification is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350, and in response to this lending notification, the medal number control unit 350 returns a lending reception result response notification to the lending machine 700.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing details of communication performed between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700.

FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a data structure of a message exchanged in communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. This message consists of five types: message length, command, serial number, data part, and checker. The message length stores the length of the entire message. The command stores a command code for identifying the type of gaming machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, and rental reception result response notification. The serial number stores the serial number in the gaming machine information notification, the counting serial number in the counting notification, and the lending serial number in the lending notification and lending reception result response notification. The range of various serial numbers is 0 to 255, and the serial number becomes 0 when the power is turned on, returns to 1 when it reaches 255, and then repeats from 1 to 255. The data section stores various types of data, and the checksum stores the lower 1 byte of the sum obtained by adding up the data from the message length to the data section.

FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data portion of the gaming machine information notification. The data portion of the game machine information notification stores a code representing the type of pachinko game machine, reel type game machine, arranged ball game machine, etc. In the case of this embodiment, a code representing a reel-type gaming machine is stored. In addition to the gaming machine performance information and gaming machine installation information described using FIG. 6, the gaming machine information type includes hole control/fraud monitoring information. The gaming machine information type stores a code for identifying which of these three types of information the information is.

FIG. 9(a) is a diagram showing details of hole control/fraud monitoring information.

The game medal number information is information representing the current number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350.

The information on the number of inserted medals is the change in the number of inserted medals that has changed since the previous gaming machine information notification, depending on the number of inserted medals and the number of returned medals if there are returned medals when the settlement button 134 (see Figure 1) is operated. The information will be (-3 to 3 pieces). That is, the information is based on the information on the number of inserted medals and the information on the number of settled medals, which are included in the game control priority command (insertion command, settlement command) sent from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350.

The number of paid out medals information is information representing the number of paid out medals. This payout medal number information is information based on the information on the medal payout number included in the game control priority command (payout command) transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

The advantageous state information is the advantageous state information shown in FIG. 6(a) described using FIG. In addition to this, information representing the state of the gaming machine may be included.

The gaming machine error status information is information represented by an error code.

FIG. 9(b) is a list of error codes. Regarding the various errors shown in FIG. 9(b), the medal number control status command, various processing commands sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the game control priority command (error generated command).

Below, only errors that require special explanation will be explained. A medal number control disconnection is an error that occurs when the game control unit 302 detects a disconnection in the medal number control unit 350, and a game control disconnection is the opposite. This is an error when detected. The game order abnormality is an error in which the order of game progress in the game control unit 302 is abnormal. The game control command serial number abnormality is an error in which the serial number of the command from the game control unit 302 is a value other than the value obtained by adding 1 to the previous value. The payout number abnormality is an error when the payout number included in the game control state command is outside the range of 0 to 15. That is, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the maximum number of coins that can be paid out at one time is 15 coins. The mismatch in the number of coins to be paid is an error that occurs when the number of coins to be paid included in the game control priority command (settlement command) is greater than or equal to the number of coins inserted. The chip ID number mismatch is an error when the IC chip number information in the game control section information shown in FIG. 6(c) is different from the previous information. The medal number control RAM error is an error indicating a defect in the RAM 358 of the medal number control section 350. The rental machine communication abnormality is an error, which will be described in detail later, in which a rental notification has not been received even though the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is in an on state. Note that in any case where the various errors shown in FIG. 9(b) occur, all seven segments of the instruction monitor 125 shown in FIG. 1 are turned on, and the speaker 272 outputs an error notification sound. Furthermore, an error code for display is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In addition to the setting status information and front door information shown in FIG. 6(a), the game machine fraud information includes information when fraud is detected and information indicating that the number of game medals has been cleared. Contains information and security signals indicating that fraud is being detected.

The information on the number of game information includes information on the current number of bets and information on the number of payouts. These two types of information are distinguished by type information. The current number of bets is included in the start lever acceptance command (gaming control status command) when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the start lever acceptance command (gaming control status command) is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. Becomes the current bet value. Further, when a payout command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350, the payout number becomes the value of the payout number included in the payout command.

Returning to the explanation using FIG. 8(b), the gaming machine information notification sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at a 300ms cycle includes gaming machine information of the code specified by the gaming machine information type. Stored. In other words, if the value of the game machine information type is 0, the game machine performance information, if the value of the game machine information type is 1, the game machine installation information, and if the value of the game machine information type is 2, the hall console - Fraud monitoring information is stored. Gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hole control/fraud monitoring information have different notification intervals, and gaming machine performance information is notified once at the longest first time period (for example, 180 seconds). The gaming machine installation information is notified once every second time (for example, 60 seconds), and the hall console/fraud monitoring information is notified every third time (for example, the notification period of 300 ms), which is the shortest. If the notification timings of these three pieces of information overlap, the notification of the gaming machine installation information is given the highest priority, followed by the notification of the gaming machine performance information. The lowest priority is the hole control/fraud monitoring information that receives the most notifications.

FIG. 8C is a diagram showing specific contents of the data part of the count notification transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at a cycle of 300 ms. Note that, as shown in FIG. 7, the count notification is notified within a range of 90 ms or more and within 100 ms from the start of the gaming machine information notification. This is managed by a count notification interval timer that is set to 90 ms in step S3303 shown in FIG. 32, which will be described later. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the counting button 171 shown in FIG. , the number of medals corresponding to the number of short presses becomes the counted number. On the other hand, if the count button 171 is held down for 500 ms or more and a cycle of 300 ms arrives, the number of sheets to be counted becomes 50 sheets. That is, the number of sheets to be counted can be set in units of one sheet or 50 sheets at once. However, if the counted number exceeds the value of the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358, this value of the number of game medals is set as the counted number. The counted medal number information is information representing the number of medals counted determined by the operation of the counting button 171 until the cycle of 300 ms arrives. The cumulative number of counted medals is information representing the number of counted medals accumulated since the power was turned on.

FIG. 8(d) is a diagram showing specific contents of the data section of the lending notification transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 at a cycle of 300 ms. Note that, as shown in FIG. 7, the lending machine 700 notifies the medal number control unit 350 of the lending notification within 170 ms from the start of receiving the counting notification. The medal number control unit 350 monitors whether or not a lending notification is sent within 170 ms using a lending notification interval timer that is set to 170 ms in step S3502 shown in FIG. 34, which will be described later. When the lending button 707 of the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. is the number of loaned medals. On the other hand, if the "monetary balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the number of medals converted from the current balance at the predetermined rate becomes the number of loaned medals. The information on the number of loaned medals is information representing the number of loaned medals in response to the operation of the loan button 707 in this manner. Note that the predetermined amount or the number of medals equivalent to the predetermined amount can be set in advance using the lending machine 700.

FIG. 8E is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data section of the lending reception result response returned from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. As will be described in detail later, the medal number control unit 350 determines whether the number of lending medals notified by the lending notification is 50 or less, or the number of gaming medals stored in the RAM 358 is less than a lending threshold (for example, 15,000). It is determined whether the number of loaned medals received is normal or abnormal. In the lending receipt result response, this receipt result is transmitted to the lending machine 700.

Next, a description will be given of the game control status command that the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 7 transmits to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms.

FIG. 10 is a table showing game control status commands.

The game control state command is a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits represent the command type, and the lower byte represents the content. Note that FIG. 10 also shows command offsets used during transmission.

The game control unit 302 transmits a command representing advantageous state information (RB information, BB information, AT information), and after 2.98 ms has elapsed, transmits a command representing setting state information (setting changing information, setting checking information). After 2.98 ms has elapsed, a command representing front door status information (door open information) is sent. This completes the transmission of gaming machine status information.

Then, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of inserted sheets in 3 bytes (total inserted sheet number information) is divided into three times of 1 byte each and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 13H, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 14H, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 15H. Send the third byte with the command type.

Subsequently, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of coins to be paid out in 3 bytes (total number of coins to be paid out information) is divided into three 1-byte portions and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 16H, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 17H, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 18H. Send the third byte with the command type.

Next, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the MY counter value in 3 bytes (MY counter value information) is divided into 3 times of 1 byte each and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 19H, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1AH, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 1BH. Send the third byte with the command type.

Furthermore, after 2.98ms have elapsed, the information representing the total number of paid out tokens in 3 bytes (total number of paid out tokens information) is divided into 3 times of 1 byte each at an interval of 2.98ms. Send by. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1CH, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1DH, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 1EH. Send the third byte with the command type.

Then, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of paid out continuous accessory objects in 3 bytes (information on the total number of paid out continuous accessory objects) is divided into three times of 1 byte each and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. In other words, the first byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 1FH, and after 2.98ms, the second byte is sent with a command type in which the upper byte is 20H, and after 2.98ms, the upper byte is 21H. Send the third byte with the command type.

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of games played in 2 bytes (game number information) is divided into two 1-byte portions and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte is transmitted with a command type in which the upper byte is 22H, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is transmitted with a command type in which the upper byte is 23H.

Next, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, role ratio monitor information is transmitted over five commands at intervals of 2.98 ms. In other words, the command type with the upper byte of 24H transmits information representing the ratio of accessories, the command type with the upper byte of 25H transmits the information representing the continuous accessory ratio, and the command type with the upper byte of 26H transmits the information representing the ratio of useful objects. The command type with the upper byte of 27H is used to send information representing the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, and the upper byte of the command type is 28H to send information representing the state ratio of accessories. This completes the transmission of gaming machine performance information.

Furthermore, after 2.98 ms has passed, game control unit information is transmitted over 15 commands at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, information representing the IC chip ID number of the game control unit 302 in 4 bytes is divided into 4 times of 1 byte and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. Next, information representing the IC chip maker code of the game control unit 302 in 3 bytes is divided into 3 times of 1 byte and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. Subsequently, information representing the IC chip product code of the game control unit 302 in 8 bytes is divided into 8 times of 1 byte and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. This completes the transmission of gaming machine installation information.

Finally, send the checksum value. When the transmission of the checksum value is completed, the process returns to the transmission of the advantageous state information, and thereafter, the game control state commands shown in FIG. 10 are repeatedly transmitted one by one every 2.98 ms. In addition, if there is a game control priority command, the transmission of the game control state command will be interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, the medal number control state command that the medal number control section 350 shown in FIG. 7 transmits to the game control section 302 every 5.96 ms will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a table showing medal number control state commands.

The medal number control status command is also a 16-bit command, the most significant bit of the upper byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits represent the command type, and the lower byte represents the content. Note that FIG. 11 also shows command offsets used during transmission.

The medal number control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in an on state. This VL signal information corresponds to basic information and may include other information.

Next, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information representing the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 in 2 bytes is divided into 1 byte each for upper and lower parts and transmitted at intervals of 5.96 ms. That is, the lower 1 byte is transmitted with a command type in which the upper byte is 02H, and after 5.96 ms, the upper 1 byte is transmitted with the command type in which the upper byte is 03H.

Then, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of sheets to be counted (counted sheet number information) is transmitted, and when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of sheets to be lent (lending sheet number information) is transmitted.

Finally, the error code explained using FIG. 9(b) is transmitted. When the transmission of the error code is completed, the process returns to the transmission of the VL signal information, and thereafter, the medal number control state command shown in FIG. 11 is repeatedly transmitted in order every 5.96 ms. In addition, if there is a response command to the game control priority command, the transmission of the medal number control state command is interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, a security command that is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 at a cycle of 100 ms shown in FIG. 7 will be explained.

The security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on, door opening information indicating whether the front door 102 is open, and the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. information representing the number of sheets to be lent, information representing the number of sheets to be lent, and information representing the number of sheets lent out. Note that the information representing the "number of game medals", the information representing the counted number, and the information representing the number of lending medals are information transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 by the medal number control state command.

Furthermore, various processing commands are also sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400. Various processing commands include, for example, a command to return to normal when the power is restored, a command to start setting changes related to changing setting values, a command to end setting changes including changed setting values, an error occurrence command and an error cancellation command, and a command to change the number of sheets input. a bet command that includes a bet command, a settlement button command that indicates that the settlement button has been pressed, a performance information command that includes production information, a start lever reception command that indicates that the operation of the start button 135 has been accepted, and a settlement button command that indicates that the settlement button has been pressed. Examples include first to third press commands associated with acceptance of an operation, a game information command containing game information, a payout start command indicating the start of payout, and the like. Note that errors in the error generation command and error cancellation command include errors expressed by the error codes explained using FIG. This includes an open error, a rental machine abnormality error in which the VL signal is turned off, etc.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

The game control priority command is a command that is transmitted with priority over the game control state command. If there is a request for retransmission from the medal control unit 350 after transmitting the game control priority command, the game control unit 302 transmits the game control priority command to the medal control unit 350 again.

FIG. 13(a) is a diagram showing details of the game control priority command.

When the game control priority command is sent to the medal number control section 350, a response command is returned from the medal number control section 350, and when this response command is not returned, the transmission of the medal number control state command is continued. There are two types: The former game control priority command is referred to as a game control priority command 1, and the latter game control priority command is referred to as a game control priority command 2. FIG. 12 shows a communication sequence when the game control priority command 1 is transmitted.

The game control priority command 1 includes a payout command, an input command, and a settlement command. The payout command is a command type whose upper byte is 04H and transmits the number of coins to be paid out (0 to 15), then a command sequence number whose upper byte is 05H, and finally a command type whose upper byte is 06H. to send the checksum. That is, in transmitting the payout command, three commands are transmitted in succession.

The input command is a command type whose upper byte is 07H and transmits the number of sheets to be input (0 to 3 sheets), then a command sequence number whose upper byte is 08H, and finally a command type whose upper byte is 09H. to send the checksum. That is, even when transmitting the input command, three commands are transmitted in succession.

The settlement command is a command type whose upper byte is 0AH and sends the number of sheets to be paid (0 to 3 pieces), then a command sequence number whose upper byte is 0BH, and finally a command type whose upper byte is 0CH. to send the checksum. That is, even when sending a payment command, three commands are sent in succession.

When the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 12 receives the game control priority command 1, it transmits a response command.

FIG. 13(b) is a diagram showing details of the response command returned from the medal number control section 350 to the game control section 302.

The response command is sent in response to a payout command (payout response), sent in response to an input command (input response), and sent in response to a settlement command (payment response). There is. In the response command, the value of the upper byte, which is the value of the command type, is 00H. The dispensing response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-requesting the dispensing command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of payout, and abnormality corresponds to a case where the number of game medals exceeds a payout threshold (for example, 16,383 pieces) due to payout.

The submission response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-requesting the submission command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of input, and abnormality corresponds to failure of input or invalid input.

The payment response is a response command that includes any one of normality, abnormality, and re-request for payment command. Note that normality here corresponds to completion of payment, and abnormality corresponds to a case where the number of game medals exceeds a threshold value for payment (for example, 16,383 coins) as a result of payment. Note that the settlement threshold has the same value as the above-mentioned payout threshold.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), the game control priority command 2 includes an error occurrence command, a RAM clear command, and a start lever operation command. The error occurrence command is a command type whose upper byte is 01H, and is a command that includes the occurrence of various errors shown in FIG. 9(b).

The RAM clear command is a command type whose upper byte is 02H, and is a command that includes the normality of the RAM 308 determined by the game control unit 302 or the failure of the RAM 308 determined by the game control unit 302.

The start lever acceptance command is a command type whose upper byte is 03H, and since the number of bets is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, information representing the determined number of bets (current number of bets: 1 to 3) is included. This is a command.

《Design arrangement》
A predetermined number of symbols of a plurality of types are arranged on each reel 110 to 112. In order to improve the interest of the game, the slot machine 100 in this embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum pull-in range from the position where the stop operation is performed.

《Type of winning role》
The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special winning combination, a replay winning combination, and a small winning combination. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

《Types of internally elected roles》
In a game, an internal winning combination is determined by a lottery at the start of the game, and in the game, it is possible to win a winning combination corresponding to this internal winning combination. Note that depending on the winning combination, the internal winning results may be carried over to the next game.

《Types of gaming conditions》
The slot machine 100 is provided with various states with different degrees of advantage, and the degree of advantage changes by changing between these states, thereby improving the interest of the game.

《Processing overview》
Hereinafter, the processing of the game control section 302, the number of medals control section 350, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be explained using the drawings. Note that this embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information corresponding to the number of real medals (the number of virtual medals) is used without using actual medals. ``Number'' shall be used.

《Game control section main processing》
First, the game control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the game control section 302 will be explained using FIG. In addition, the figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the game control section main processing.

As described above, the game control unit 302 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 which has received this start signal is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the game control unit main processing shown in FIG. 15 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, and various variables stored in the RAM 308 (including MY counters described later) are initialized. , allows operation of the WDT 314, sets initial values, etc. Note that when the settings are changed, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. Also, if it is determined in the recovery process that there is an abnormality in the backup data in the RAM 308, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. When this initialization is performed, a RAM clear command including information as to whether or not the initialization has been successfully completed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start lever reception process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 17.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery (winning combination) is performed using this and the random numbers obtained from the random value generation circuit 316. , determine the internally elected role. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activation combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the game control section 302.

In step S106, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set in the game interval timer. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S107, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding commands (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding commands (first to third press commands) are prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S108.

In step S108, winning determination processing is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, medal award processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 22.

In step S110, a game state control process is performed. Here, the status regarding the game state is updated based on the result of the game.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process.

Next, details of the medal insertion/start lever reception process (step S102) in the game control section main process of FIG. 15 will be explained using FIG. 16. This figure is a flowchart of the medal insertion/start lever reception process (step S102) in FIG. 15.

First, in step S1001 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S1003, and if there is any error status, the process advances to step S1002.

In step S1002, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process returns to step S1001.

In step S1003, one interrupt time waiting process is executed, and the process advances to step S1004.

In step S1004, interrupt processing is prohibited, and the process advances to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not a setting key operation is accepted. If the setting key operation is accepted, the process advances to step S1006, and if the setting key operation is not accepted, the process advances to step S1007.

In step S1006, a process for confirming acceptance of the setting key operation is executed, and the process returns to step S1001.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the VL signal is on. This VL signal is a signal that is transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal number control section 350 in an always-on state. The game control section 302 grasps the state of the VL signal based on the information transmitted from the medal number control section 350. If the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S1008, and if the VL signal is off, the process advances to step S1001 again.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted, the process advances to step S1009, and if the operation of the start lever 135 has not been accepted, the process advances to step S1011.

In step S1009, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay combination is won and a replay is granted. If the replay flag is off, the process advances to step S1010, and if the replay flag is on, this medal insertion/start lever reception process is ended.

In step S1010, the current number of bets (current number of bets) is compared with the number required to start the game (startable number of coins). If the current number of bets is smaller than the startable number of coins, the process advances to step S1011, and if the current bet number is greater than or equal to the startable number of coins, the process advances to step S1012.

In step S1011, a process during medal insertion is executed, and the process returns to step S1001. The details of the medal insertion process will be described later using FIG. 17.

In step S1012, 03H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1013. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a start lever acceptance command.

In step S1013, the current number of bets is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1014.

In step S1014, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 21.

In step S1015, a start lever acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and this medal insertion/start lever acceptance process is ended.

Next, details of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in the medal insertion/start lever reception process of FIG. 16 will be described using FIG. 17. This figure is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG. 16.

First, in step S1101 that is executed first, it is determined whether or not the operation of the payment button 134 has been accepted. If the operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted, the process advances to step S1102, and if the operation of the settlement button 134 has not been accepted, the process advances to step S1103.

In step S1102, a payment button process is executed, and this medal insertion process is ended. Note that details of the payment button process will be described later using FIG. 18.

In step S1103, it is determined whether the operation of any of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted. If the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted, the process advances to step S1104, and if the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has not been accepted, the medal insertion process is ended.

In step S1104, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay combination is won and a replay is granted. If the replay flag is off, the process advances to step S1105, and if the replay flag is on, the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1105, 0 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process advances to step S1106. Note that this requested number of medals is a value used to set the number of medals exchanged with the medal number control section 350.

In step S1106, the current number of bets and the maximum number of bets (3 in this embodiment) are compared. If the current number of bets is not equal to the maximum number of bets, the process advances to step S1107, and if the current number of bets is equal to the maximum number of bets, the process advances to step S1110.

In step S1107, the value obtained by subtracting the current number of bets from the maximum number of bets is set as the requested number of coins, and the process advances to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined whether the bet buttons 130, 132 that have been determined to have received an operation are the one-copy bet button 130. If the bet button 130, 132 determined to have received the operation is the one-copy bet button 130, the process advances to step S1109, otherwise the process advances to step S1110.

In step S1109, 1 is set as the requested number of sheets, and the process advances to step S1110.

In steps S1105 to S1109 described above, if the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets, the requested number of coins becomes 0. Also, if the MAX bet button 132 is operated while the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, if the current number of bets is 0 against the maximum number of bets of 3, the requested number is 3, and if the current number of bets is 1 The required number of coins is 2, and if the current number of bets is 2, the required number of coins is 1. Further, if the one bet button 130 is operated while the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number, the requested number becomes one.

In step S1110, 07H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1111. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command to be sent is an input command.

In step S1111, a process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit is executed, and the process advances to step S1112. Note that details of the process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit will be described later using FIG. 19.

In step S1112, a response result to the command transmitted in step S1111 is awaited, and it is determined whether or not this result is "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1113; if the response result is not "normal", the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1113, the requested number of coins is added to the current number of bets, and the process advances to step S1114.

In step S1114, a bet button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and this medal insertion process is ended.

Next, details of the payment button process (step S1102) in the medal insertion process of FIG. 17 will be described using FIG. 18. This figure is a flowchart of the payment button process (step S1102) in FIG. 17.

First, in step S1201 that is executed first, a payment button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set to ON when a replay combination is won and a replay is awarded. If the replay flag is off, the process advances to step S1203, and if the replay flag is on, the settlement button process is ended.

In step S1203, the requested number of coins and the current bet amount are set, and the process advances to step S1204.

In step S1204, 0AH is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1205. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a settlement command.

In step S1205, a process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit is executed, and the process advances to step S1206. Note that details of the process of transmitting variation information to the medal number control unit will be described later using FIG. 19.

In step S1206, it is determined whether the response result to the command transmitted in step S1205 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1207, and if the response result is not "normal", the payment button process is ended.

In step S1207, the current number of bets is set to 0, and this settlement button process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 19, the process of transmitting fluctuation information to the medal number control unit in the process of inserting medals in FIG. ), and the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit (step S1605) in the medal awarding process of FIG. 22 will be described in detail. This figure is a flowchart of the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605) in FIGS. 17, 18, and 22.

First, in step S1301 that is executed first, an initial value (4 in this embodiment) is set as the value of the remaining number of transmissions, and the process advances to step S1302.

In step S1302, information indicating that the response result is "abnormal" is set, and the process advances to step S1303. Note that this response result is overwritten by the response result from the medal number control unit 350, but if it is not overwritten (there is no response), it indicates an "abnormality".

In step S1303, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is any error status, this variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit is ended, and if there is no error status, the process advances to step S1304.

In step S1304, an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 100 ms) is set to the value of the response standby timer, and the process advances to step S1305.

In step S1305, the value of the remaining number of transmissions is subtracted by 1, and the process advances to step S1306.

In step S1306, if the value of the remaining number of transmissions is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1307, and if the value of the remaining number of transmissions is 0, this process of transmitting the variation information to the medal number control unit is ended.

In step S1307, triple command transmission processing is executed, and the process advances to step S1308. Note that details of this three-command transmission process will be described later using FIG. 20.

In step S1308, if the value of the response wait timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if the value of the response wait timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S1303 again.

In step S1309, if a response from the medal number control unit 350 has been received, the process proceeds to step S1310, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1308 again.

In step S1310, if the reception result of the response from the medal number control unit 350 is "re-request", the process proceeds to step S1303 again, and if the reception result is other than that, the process proceeds to step S1311.

In step S1311, the result of receiving the response from the medal number control unit 350 is stored as a response result, and the process proceeds to step S1312.

In step S1312, the command serial number is incremented by 1, and this variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit is ended.

Next, using FIG. 20, details of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit in FIG. 19 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in FIG. 19. Here, the triple command is a command consisting of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in a row, and in this embodiment, each of the input command, settlement command, and payout command shown in FIG. It is a series of commands.

First, in step S1401 that is executed first, the checksum value is set to 0 (initialized), and the process advances to step S1402.

In step S1402, the requested number of medals is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1403.

In step S1403, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 21.

In step S1404, the checksum value is updated using the transmission content (lower byte).

In step S1405, the value of the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, a command serial number is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1407.

In step S1407, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 21.

In step S1408, the checksum value is updated using the transmission content (lower byte).

In step S1409, the value of the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a checksum is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1411.

In step S1411, priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 21.

Next, using FIG. 21, the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit in the medal insertion/start lever reception process of FIG. 16 (step S1014) and the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit in the triple command transmission process of FIG. Details of the command transmission process (steps S1403, S1406, and S1409) will be explained. This figure is a flowchart of the priority command transmission process to the medal number control unit (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and step S1409) in FIGS. 16 and 20.

First, in step S1501 that is executed first, it is determined whether the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process advances to step S1502, and if the transmission buffer is not empty, this step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the transmission content (2 bytes) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit, and the priority command transmission processing to the medal number control unit is ended.

Next, details of the medal awarding process (step S109) in the game control section main process of FIG. 15 will be explained using FIG. 22. This figure is a flowchart of the medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 15.

First, in step S1601 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S1602, and if there is any error status, the process advances to step S1603.

In step S1602, the value of the number of coins to be paid out is set as the requested number of coins, and the process advances to step S1604.

In step S1603, error notification processing corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process returns to step S1601.

In step S1604, 04H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process advances to step S1605. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the transmitted command is a payout command.

In step S1605, a process for transmitting fluctuation information to the medal number control unit (FIG. 19) is executed, and the process advances to step S1606.

In step S1606, it is determined whether the response result to the command transmitted in step S1605 was "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process advances to step S1607; if the response result is not "normal", the process advances to step S1608.

In step S1607, a payout command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and this medal awarding process is ended.

In step S1608, if there is no error request, a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout) is sent to the first sub-control unit, and the process advances to step S1601.

《Game control unit timer interrupt processing》
Next, the game control section timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the game control section 302 will be explained using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the game control section timer interrupt processing.

The game control unit 302 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 1.49ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt signal as a trigger to trigger the game control unit timer interrupt. start the loading process at a predetermined period.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, restart is performed once every 1.49 ms, which is the cycle of the game control unit timer interrupt.

In step S203, error monitoring processing is executed. Here, processing corresponding to various errors such as an abnormality in the communication state with the medal number control unit 350 and an abnormality in the opening/closing state of the door is performed. Note that if there is any error status, an error occurrence command including information on this error status is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S204, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed through this process.

In step S205, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S206, medal number control command reception processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 25.

In step S207, a game control command transmission process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 26.

In step S208, a performance command transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in the main process, timer interrupt process, etc. of the game control unit 302 are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in this embodiment, where bit 15 is strobe information (when turned on, it indicates that data is being set), and bit 11 is strobe information. -14 are command types (for example, basic commands, bet commands, start lever acceptance commands, internal winning commands, reel rotation start commands associated with the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, and commands associated with acceptance of operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139. 1st to 3rd press commands, 1st to 3rd stop commands when the reels 110 to 112 stop, winning commands, payout number commands and payout completion commands associated with medal payout processing, game status update commands, etc.), bits 0 to 3 10 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it is possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the game control unit 302, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the game control unit 302. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S209, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S204, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Execute error handling. Further, various lamps 336 and various seven segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S210, security command transmission processing is executed. Specifically, a security command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 every 100 ms. This security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on, door opening information indicating whether the front door 102 is open, and the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 308. information representing the number of sheets to be lent, information representing the number of sheets to be lent, and the like.

In step S211, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in respective time units, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S212, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When a low voltage signal is received (when a power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S214, and when a low voltage signal is not received (when a power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S213. move on.

In step S213, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main processing of the game control section shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S214, information (recovery data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power restoration, is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. A checksum value for a predetermined area including at least the above is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and the power status is set to "normal".

Next, details of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 23, will be explained using FIG. 24. This figure is a flowchart of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG.

First, in step S2001 that is executed first, if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is not 0, the process advances to step S2002, and if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is 0, the process advances to step S2003.

In step S2002, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 is on, the process advances to step S2004, and if the strobe signal is off, the process advances to step S2005.

In step S2003, the value of the disconnection determination timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process advances to step S2005.

In step S2004, the value of the disconnection determination timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process advances to step S2005.

In step S2005, if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is 1, the process advances to step S2006, and if the value of the timer for disconnection determination is not 1, this disconnection determination process is ended.

In step S2006, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S2007, and if there is any error status, this disconnection determination process is ended.

In step S2007, information indicating a disconnection error with the medal number control unit 350 is set as the error status, and this disconnection determination process is ended.

Next, details of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in the game control section timer interrupt process of FIG. 23 will be explained using FIG. 25. This figure is a flowchart of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 23.

First, in step S2101 that is executed first, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control section 350 is on, the process advances to step S2102, and if the strobe signal is off, this medal number control command reception process is ended.

In step S2102, information in the RAM 308 is updated based on the command received from the medal number control unit 350. These commands include six types of medal number control status commands (FIG. 11) and response commands (FIG. 13(b)), and the type of command can be identified by the upper byte. That is, the type of command is identified by referring to the upper byte of the received command, and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated based on the contents.

In step S2103, it is determined whether there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process advances to step S2104, and if there is any error status, this medal number control command reception process is ended.

In step S2104, if the received command is a command that includes an error code (an error code in the medal number control unit 350), the error code is set to the error status. Note that if there is no error in the medal number control unit 350, an error code indicating normality will be set in the error status, but in this case, there will be no error status.

Next, details of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 23 will be explained using FIG. 26. This figure is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. 23.

First, in step S2201 that is executed first, it is determined whether the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process advances to step S2202, and if this transmission buffer is not empty, the process advances to step S2207.

In step S2202, the command offset (see FIG. 10) is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 41 (1 after 41). In this embodiment, as explained using FIG. 10, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly sent in order from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be sent.

In step S2203, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information targeted by this command are read out to generate transmission content, and the transmission content is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S2204, it is determined whether the command offset is 41 or not. Among the 41 types of commands transmitted from the game control means to the medal number control unit 350, the last command (41st transmitted command) is a check generated based on the transmitted contents of the previous commands. It's Sam. That is, the checksum is updated for command offsets from 1 to 40 (step S2205), and when the command offset reaches 41, the checksum updated up to that point is sent to the medal number control unit 350 (step S2203, step S2207), and the checksum value is initialized to generate a new checksum (step S2206). After the above processing, the process advances to step S2207.

In step S2207, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 are output to the medal number control unit 350 (the I/O output port is updated). Note that the information output here is received by the medal number control unit 350 when the strobe signal is set to ON in step S2209, which will be described later.

In step S2208, it is determined whether the strobe signal to the medal number control unit 350 is off. If the strobe signal to the medal number control unit 350 is off, the process advances to step S2209, and if the strobe signal to the medal number control unit 350 is on, the process advances to step S2210.

In step S2209, the strobe signal for the medal number control unit 350 is set to ON, and this game control state command transmission process is ended.

In step S2210, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 are cleared, and the process advances to step S2211.

In step S2211, the strobe signal for the medal number control section 350 is set to OFF, and this game control state command transmission process is ended.

《Medal number control section main processing》
Next, the medal number control section main processing executed by the CPU 354 of the medal number control section 350 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the medal number control section.

As described above, the medal number control section 350 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 which has received this activation signal performs a reset start by the reset interrupt and executes the medal number control unit main processing shown in FIG. 27 in accordance with the control program stored in advance in the ROM 356.

When the power is turned on, first, a power-on process is performed in step S301. Here, the WDT is initialized and restarted until the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined voltage (9V) or higher, and when the power supply voltage reaches the predetermined voltage, access to the RAM 358 is permitted and the interrupt cycle is set. be done. Furthermore, communication circuit settings, etc. are also performed.

In step S302, RAM abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S303. Note that details of this RAM abnormality determination process will be described later using FIG. 28.

In step S303, a preparation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304. Note that details of this preparation process will be described later using FIG. 31.

In step S304, a gaming machine information notification transmission process is executed, and the process advances to step S305. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 32.

In step S305, a count notification transmission process is executed, and the process advances to step S306. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 34.

In step S306, a rental notification reception confirmation process is executed, and the process advances to step S307. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 35.

In step S307, if the rental notification reception flag is on, the process proceeds to step S308, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304 again.

In step S308, a process for transmitting a loan receipt result response is executed, and the process returns to step S304. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 36.

Next, details of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 27 will be described using FIG. 28. This figure is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG.

First, in step S3001 that is executed first, if the power status is "normal", the process advances to step S3002, and if the power status is other than "normal", the process advances to step S3005.

In step S3002, a checksum value is derived based on the data in the RAM 358, and the process advances to step S3003.

In step S3003, the checksum value derived in step S3002 is compared with the checksum value derived at the time of power outage, and if these values are the same, the checksum value is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S3004. , if these values are different, it is determined that the checksum value is not normal and the process advances to step S3005.

In step S3004, normal RAM clear processing is executed, and the process advances to step S3008. In this embodiment, there are four types of RAM clear processing, and as shown in FIG. 29, the normal RAM clear processing has the least number of objects to be cleared. In addition to the area for storing information during gaming, the RAM 358 includes an area for storing hardware information such as chip ID, an area for storing information regarding the state of the gaming machine such as the ratio of advantageous sections, and information received from the gaming control unit 302. There is a buffer that temporarily stores the information that has been played, but in normal RAM clearing processing, the area that stores information during the game is mainly cleared.

In step S3005, all RAM clear processing is executed, and the process advances to step S3006. Among the four types of RAM clear processing, the all RAM clear processing has the largest number of objects to be cleared, and as shown in FIG. 29, the entire area is cleared.

In step S3006, information indicating "RAM defective" is stored as RAM defect information, and the process advances to step S3007.

In step S3007, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the process advances to step S3008.

In step S3008, if the game medal number clear button 172 is operated, the process advances to step S3009, and if it is not operated, the process advances to step S3011.

In step S3009, the number of game medals is set to 0, and the process advances to step S3010.

In step S3010, information indicating "detected" is set as game medal number clear detection information, and the process advances to step S3011.

In step S3011, the power-on flag is set to on.

In step S3012, execution of interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3013, this determination process is repeatedly executed until the strobe signal on from the game control section 302 is detected, and when the strobe signal on is detected, the process advances to step S3014.

In step S3014, execution of interrupt processing is prohibited.

In step S3015, the power-on flag is set to off.

In step S3016, it is determined whether the gaming control unit RAM clear command among the gaming control priority commands shown in FIG. 13(a) has been received. If this command has been received, the process advances to step S3017, and if it has not been received, the process advances to step S3020.

In step S3017, if the information included in the game control unit RAM clear command indicates clearing is "normal", the process advances to step S3018, and if the information does not indicate "normal", the process advances to step S3019.

In step S3018, limited (2) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 29, the area excluding chip information, role ratio monitor information, etc. is cleared.

In step S3019, limited (1) RAM clear processing is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 29, the area excluding chip information etc. is cleared.

In step S3020, if information indicating "RAM defect" is stored as RAM defect information, the process advances to step S3021; if information indicating "RAM defect" is not stored as RAM defect information, this RAM abnormality determination process is ended. do.

In step S3021, information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S3022, error request setting processing is executed. Note that details of this error request setting process will be described later using FIG. 30.

Next, details of the error request setting process (step S3022) in the RAM abnormality determination process etc. in FIG. 28 will be described using FIG. 30. This figure is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 28 and the like.

First, in step S3101 that is executed first, if no error code is set in the error request, the process advances to step S3102, and if some error code has already been set, the error request setting process is ended.

In step S3102, the value of the error request setting value (error code) is set as the error request.

In step S3103, if the error request is "E9" shown in FIG. 9(b), the process advances to step S3104; otherwise, the process advances to step S3105.

In step S3104, the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to on, and the process advances to step S3105.

In step S3105, if the error request is "E7" shown in FIG. 9(b), the process advances to step S3106; otherwise, this error request setting process ends.

In step S3106, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and this error request setting process is ended.

Next, details of the preparation process (step S303) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 27 will be described using FIG. 31. This figure is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3201 that is executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set to the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3202, the chip information (ID, manufacturer code, product code) of the medal number control unit 350 is updated. Note that this information is stored in the ROM of the medal control section.

In step S3203, interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3204, this process is repeatedly executed while the gaming control unit chip ID acquisition flag is on, and when the gaming control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to off, the process advances to step S3205.

In step S3205, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3206, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment).

Next, details of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in the medal number control section main process of FIG. 27 will be explained using FIG. 32. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3301 that is executed first, this process is repeatedly executed until the value of the gaming machine information notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S3320.

In step S3302, the gaming machine information notification interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 300.98 ms in this embodiment).

In step S3303, a value corresponding to 90 ms is set as the value of the count notification interval timer.

In step S3304, the value of the number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for count determination.

In step S3305, gaming machine information type acquisition processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 33.

In step S3306, preparations are made to transmit various gaming machine information according to the gaming machine information type. Specifically, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, preparations are made to send the gaming machine performance information, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, preparations are made to send the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine information type is prepared to be sent. If the value of the machine information type is 2, preparations are made to transmit hole control/fraud monitoring information.

In step S3307, if the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the process advances to step S3308, and if the value of the gaming machine information type is other than 2, the process advances to step S3311.

In step S3308, the value of the number of inserted medals is set to zero.

In step S3309, the value of the number of medals to be paid out is set to zero.

In step S3310, the value of the number of game information is set to zero.

In steps S3311 to S3317, various gaming machine information (telegram length, command type, gaming machine information serial number, gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, checksum) (see FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b)) are sequentially transmitted. Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the content of transmission up to that point.

In step S3318, the gaming machine information serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the gaming machine information serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in the gaming machine information notification sending process of FIG. 32 will be described using FIG. 33. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. 32.

First, in step S3401 that is executed first, if the value of the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3402, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3403, the gaming machine information type is set to 1, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

In step S3404, 2 is set for the gaming machine information type, and the process advances to step S3405.

In step S3405, if the value of the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is 0, the process advances to step S3406, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the gaming machine information type acquisition process is ended.

In step S3406, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3407, the gaming machine information type is set to 0, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

Next, details of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 27 will be described using FIG. 34. This figure is a flowchart of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3501 that is executed first, this process is repeatedly executed until the value of the count notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer becomes 0, the process advances to step S3502.

In step S3502, the rental notification interval timer is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to 170 ms in this embodiment).

In steps S3503 to S3505, the message length, command type, and counting serial number are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S3506, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3507, if the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S3508, and if the signal is off, the process advances to step S3513. This VL signal is a signal that is always in an on state and is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 if it is normal.

In step S3508, if the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is not 0, the process advances to step S3509, and if the planned number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process advances to step S3513.

In step S3509, the input prohibition flag is set to on.

In step S3510, if the number of coins to be counted is equal to or greater than the number of game medals for count determination, the process advances to step S3511, and if the number of coins to be counted is less than the number of game medals for count determination, the process advances to step S3512.

In step S3511, the value of the number of game medals for counting determination is set to the number of medals to be counted.

In step S3512, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to the number of sheets to be counted.

In step S3513, the counted number of sheets is transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S3514, the value of the counted number is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3515, the number of sheets to be counted is set to zero.

In step S3516, the input prohibition flag is set to OFF.

In step S3517, the value of the counted number is added to the cumulative number of medals.

In step S3518, the cumulative number of medals is transmitted to lending machine 700.

In step S3519, the checksum is transmitted to rental machine 700. Note that the checksum value transmitted here is a value updated based on the data transmitted to the rental machine 700 in this count notification transmission process.

In step S3520, the counting serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the counting serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, details of the lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 27 will be described using FIG. 35. This figure is a flowchart of the lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3601 that is executed first, if the rental notification reception flag is off, the process advances to step S3602, and if the flag is on, this rental notification reception confirmation process is ended.

In step S3602, if the value of the lending notification interval timer is 0, the process advances to step S3603, and if the same value is not 0, the process returns to step S3601.

In step S3603, if the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S3604, and if the signal is off, the rental notification reception confirmation process is ended. This VL signal is a signal that is transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal number control section 350 in an always-on state.

In step S3604, the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1, and this rental notification reception confirmation process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 36, details of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 27 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the lending reception result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG.

First, in step S3701 that is executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set in the rental machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3702, the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to OFF.

In step S3703, if the lending number receipt result is "normal", the process advances to step S3704, and if it is other than "normal", the process advances to step S3707.

In step S3704, the value of the lending serial number is set to the normal lending serial number.

In step S3705, the value of the rental serial number is set in the rental serial number for confirmation. The confirmation lending serial number is a value used for comparison with the next lending serial number (step S4104 in FIG. 39), and step S3705 is provided in preparation for this comparison.

In step S3706, the confirmation loan serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the rental serial number for confirmation is 0 only when the power is turned on.

In steps S3707 to S3711, the length of the message, the command type, the normal lending serial number, the receipt result of the number of lending sheets, and the checksum) are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700. Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the previous transmission content.

In step S3712, if the lending number receipt result is "normal", the process advances to step S3712, and if it is other than "normal", this lending reception result response transmission process is ended.

In step S3713, standby processing is executed until the transmission from step S3707 to step S3711 is completed.

In step S3714, the number of loaned medals is added to the number of game medals, and the lending reception result response transmission process ends.

《Medal number control unit timer interrupt processing》
Next, the medal number control section timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the medal number control section 350 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the medal number control section timer interrupt processing.

The medal number control section 350 is equipped with a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (once every 0.745 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the medal number control section timer to be activated. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the values of each register of the CPU are temporarily saved in the stack area.

In step S402, in order to prevent the count value of the WDT from exceeding the initial setting value and a WDT interrupt from occurring (to prevent the detection of a processing abnormality), the WDT is periodically activated (in this embodiment, the medal count control unit timer is used). The restart is performed once every 0.745ms, which is the interrupt cycle.

In step S403, input port status update processing (port reading) is performed. In this input port status update process, the input contents for the I/O input ports are stored in the signal status storage area in the RAM 358.

In step S404, rental notification reception processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 38.

In step S405, processing for updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 40.

In step S406, a game control unit command reception process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 41.

In step S407, error monitoring processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 52.

In step S408, a medal number control command transmission process to the game control unit is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 53.

In step S409, display processing is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 54.

In step S410, timer update processing is performed to update various timers in respective time units.

In step S411, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (if a power cutoff is detected), the process advances to step S413, and if a low voltage signal is not received (a power cutoff is not detected), the process goes to step S412. move on.

In step S412, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S401 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main process of the medal number control section shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S413, information (recovery data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power recovery, is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 358, and the used area of the RAM 358 is saved. A checksum value for a predetermined area including at least the above is derived and stored in the RAM 358, and the power status is set to "normal". Note that when the gaming control unit 302 detects the power cutoff, similar processing (step S214 in FIG. 23) is executed, but the processing here ends before the processing on the gaming control unit 302 side ends. If this happens, commands from the game control section 302 cannot be received. In order to avoid such a problem, this embodiment employs a circuit configuration in which the processing here ends after the processing on the game control section 302 side ends.

Next, using FIG. 38, details of the lending notification receiving process (step S404) in the medal number control section timer interrupt process of FIG. 37 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the lending notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4001 that is executed first, the lending notification reception flag is set to OFF.

In step S4002, if a rental notification is received from the rental machine 700, the process advances to step S4003, and if not received, this rental notification reception process is ended.

In step S4003, information in the RAM 358 is updated based on the received lending notice. That is, the data included in the lending notice is stored in the RAM 358.

In step S4004, a loan number determination process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 39.

In step S4005, the determination result in step S4004 is set as the result of receiving the number of lending sheets.

In step S4006, the rental notification reception flag is set to ON, and this rental notification reception process ends.

Next, using FIG. 39, details of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in the lending notification receiving process of FIG. 38 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 38.

First, in step S4101 that is executed first, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

In step S4102, a checksum is calculated from the data of the received rental notification.

In step S4103, the value of the checksum included in the received lending notification is compared with the value calculated in step S4102, and if the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4104, and if the two are different, the number of borrowed sheets is determined. Finish the process.

In step S4104, the value of the rental serial number included in the received rental notification is compared with the value of the confirmation rental serial number stored in the RAM 358. If the two are equal, the process advances to step S4105, and if the two are different, this rental The number of sheets determination process ends. Note that if the previous lending notification was received normally, the confirmation lending serial number here will be the value set in steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 36 (the updated lending serial number received last time). .

In step S4105, if the received lending notification message length and command type information correspond to the lending notification, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4106; otherwise, this lending number determination process ends. do.

In step S4106, if the value of the number of rental sheets included in the received rental notification is 0, the process advances to step S4111, and if the value is not 0, the process advances to step S4107.

In step S4107, if the value of the number of game medals is less than 15,000, the process advances to step S4108, and if the same value is 15,000 or more, this lending number determination process is ended.

In step S4108, it is determined whether the value of the gaming machine information type of the previously transmitted gaming machine information notification was 2, that is, whether the gaming machine information notification was about hole con/fraud monitoring information, and the value of the gaming machine information type is determined. If the value is 2, the process advances to step S4109, and if the same value is not 2, this lending number determination process is ended.

In step S4109, if the value of the counted number in the previously transmitted counting notification is 0, the process advances to step S4110, and if the same value is not 0, this lending number determination process is ended.

In step S4110, if the value of the number of rental sheets included in the received rental notification is 50 or less, the process advances to step S4111, and if the same value is greater than 50, the process of determining the number of rental sheets ends.

In step S4111, the determination result is set to "normal", and this lending number determination process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 40, details of the scheduled number of tokens to be counted update process (step S405) in the medal number control section timer interrupt process of FIG. 37 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the scheduled counting number update process (step S405) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4201 that is executed first, if the power-on flag is on, the process advances to step S4202, and if the flag is off, the process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4202, if the VL signal is on, the process advances to step S4203, and if the signal is off, the process advances to step S4213. In addition, this VL signal is a signal that is always transmitted from the rental machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in an on state if it is normal.

In step S4203, if the counting button 171 is being operated, the process advances to step S4204, and if the button is not being operated, the process advances to step S4210.

In step S4204, if the count long press flag is off, the process advances to step S4205, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4208.

In step S4205, if the value of the counting long press timer is 0, the process advances to step S4206, and if the same value is not 0, the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4206, the value of the counting long press timer is set to an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 500 ms), and the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4207, if the value of the count long press timer is 1, the process advances to step S4208, and if the same value is not 1, the process advances to step S4210.

In step S4208, the count long press flag is set to on.

In step S4209, the value of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is set to 50, and this scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process is ended.

In step S4210, if the count button 171 was operated immediately before (the count button 171 was released), the process advances to step S4211, and otherwise, this process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted ends.

In step S4211, if the count long press flag is off, the process advances to step S4212, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4213.

In step S4212, 1 is added to the value of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, and this scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process is ended.

In step S4213, the counting long press flag is set to OFF.

In step S4214, the value of the count long press timer is set to 0.

In step S4215, the value of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is cleared (set to 0), and this scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process is ended.

Next, details of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 37 will be explained using FIG. 41. This figure is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4301 that is executed first, if switching from OFF to ON of the strobe signal from the game control unit 302 is detected, the process advances to step S4302, and in other cases, this game control unit command reception processing end.

In step S4302, an initial value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 190 ms) is set to the game control command disconnection timer.

In step S4303, if the received command is a gaming control state command, the process advances to step S4304, and if the received command is not a gaming control state command (it is a gaming control priority command), the process advances to step S4305.

In step S4304, gaming control state command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 42.

In step S4305, a game control priority command reception process is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 43.

Next, details of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in the game control unit command reception process of FIG. 41 will be explained using FIG. 42. This figure is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. 41.

First, in step S4401, which is executed first, if the received command is a command to transmit a checksum, the process advances to step S4404, and if the received command is any other command, the process advances to step S4402. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly sent from the game control means to the medal number control unit 350, and a check is made in which the last command is calculated from the contents of the previous 40 types of commands. This is a command to send a thumb. That is, for the 1st to 40th commands, the process advances to step S4402, and for the 41st command, the process advances to step S4404.

In step S4402, the contents of the command reception buffer are updated according to the contents of the received command.

In step S4403, the checksum is updated based on the contents of the received command, and this game control state command reception process is ended.

In step S4404, the checksum value updated according to the contents of the 1st to 40th commands in step S4403 is compared with the checksum value included in the command received from the gaming control unit 302, and if the two are equal, it is considered normal. It is determined, and the process advances to step S4405, and if the two are different, this game control state command reception process is ended.

In step S4405, the checksum value updated in step S4403 is cleared.

In step S4406, the value of the gaming machine state information buffer (the value of the gaming machine state information shown in FIG. 6(a)) among the contents of the command reception buffer is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4407, if the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is off, the process advances to step S4408, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4410.

In step S4408, the acquisition chip ID is acquired based on the information in the gaming machine installation information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer.

In step S4409, if the chip ID stored in the RAM 358 and the acquired chip ID obtained in step S4408 match, the process advances to step S4410, and if they do not match, the process advances to step S4414.

In step S4410, among the contents of the command reception buffer, the value of the gaming machine installation information buffer (the value of the gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 6(c)) is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4411, the value of the role ratio monitor information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer is set in the RAM 358. Through steps S4411 and S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 6(b) is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4413, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to OFF, and this game control state command reception process is ended.

In step S4414, information indicating "chip ID number mismatch" (error code E7) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4415, the error request setting process of FIG. 30 is executed, and this game control state command reception process is ended.

Next, details of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in the game control unit command reception process of FIG. 41 will be explained using FIGS. 43 and 44. These figures are flowcharts of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 41.

First, in step S4501 that is executed first, if a triple command is received, the process advances to step S4502, and if the command is other than the triple command, the process advances to step S4514 in FIG. 44. As mentioned above, a triple command is a command consisting of a group of commands that are transmitted three times in a row, and in this embodiment, each of the input command, settlement command, and payout command shown in FIG. is a triple command. That is, if the above triple command is received among the game control priority commands, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if an error occurrence command, RAM clear command, or start lever acceptance command other than these commands is received, the process proceeds to the step of FIG. 44. The process will proceed to S4514.

In step S4502, if the last command of the triple command is received, the process advances to step S4504; otherwise, the process advances to step S4503. In this embodiment, the last command of the triple command is a checksum, and the value of this checksum is calculated based on the contents of the commands excluding the last command. That is, for commands other than the last command, the process advances to step S4503 and the contents thereof are stored in the reception buffer, and when the last command is received, the process advances to step S4504.

In step S4504, information indicating "request" is set in the response command.

In step S4505, a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the receive buffer updated in step S4503.

In step S4506, the checksum value calculated in step S4505 is compared with the checksum value included in the last command of the triple command, and if the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process advances to step S4507. If they are different, this game control priority command reception process is ended.

In step S4507, if the game control command serial number update flag to be described later is on, the process proceeds to step S4508, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4510.

In step S4508, the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer is set to the value of the game control command serial number.

In step S4509, the game control command serial number update flag is set to OFF.

Note that steps S4507 to S4509 are provided for initializing the command serial number for determination.

In step S4510, if the value of the serial number of the triple command stored in the reception buffer is equal to the value of the gaming control command serial number (gaming control command serial number (command serial number for determination) updated in the previous S4511), step S4511 If the two are different, the process advances to step S4512.

In step S4511, 1 is added to the game control command serial number, and the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG. 44.

In step S4512, information (error code E3) indicating "gaming control command serial number abnormality" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4513, the error request setting process of FIG. 30 is executed, and this game control priority command reception process is ended.

In step S4514 of FIG. 44, if the received command is a RAM clear command, the process advances to step S4515; otherwise, the process advances to step S4516.

In step S4515, RAM clear command reception is executed. Note that in this embodiment, nothing is executed here.

In step S4516, if the received command is an input command, the process advances to step S4517; otherwise, the process advances to step S4518.

In step S4517, input command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 45.

In step S4518, if the received command is a settlement command, the process advances to step S4519; otherwise, the process advances to step S4520.

In step S4519, payment command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 46.

In step S4520, if the received command is a start lever acceptance command, the process advances to step S4521; otherwise, the process advances to step S4522.

In step S4521, start lever acceptance command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 47.

In step S4522, if the received command is a payout command, the process advances to step S4523; otherwise, the process advances to step S4524.

In step S4523, payout command reception processing is executed. Details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 49.

In step S4523, error command reception processing is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 51.

Next, details of the input command reception process (step S4517) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 43 and 44 will be explained using FIG. 45. This figure is a flowchart of the input command reception process (step S4517) in FIG.

First, in step S4601 that is executed first, information indicating "re-request" is set in the response command.

In step S4602, if the input prohibition flag is off, the process advances to step S4603, and if the flag is on, the input command reception process is ended.

In step S4603, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4604, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than or equal to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands), the process advances to step S4605; otherwise, this input command Ends reception processing.

In step S4605, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is added to the value of the number of inserted medals.

In step S4606, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is added to the value of the current bet amount.

In step S4607, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands) is subtracted from the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4608, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this input command reception processing is ended.

Next, details of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 43 and 44 will be explained using FIG. 46. This figure is a flowchart of the payment command reception process (step S4519) in FIG. 44.

First, in step S4701 that is executed first, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the value of the current bet amount.

In step S4702, if the current value of the bet number is 0, the process proceeds to step S4703, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4703, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the value of the number of inserted medals.

In step S4704, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands) is added to the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4705, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this payment command receiving process is ended.

In step S4706, information (error code E6) indicating "inconsistency in number of paid sheets" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4707, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 30 is executed, and this settlement command receiving process is ended.

Next, details of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 43 and 44 will be explained using FIG. 47. This figure is a flowchart of the start lever acceptance command reception process (step S4521) in FIG.

First, in step S4801 that is executed first, the payout command acquisition flag is set to on.

In step S4802, if the game interval abnormality timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4803, and if the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4807.

In step S4803, the value of the game interval abnormality timer is set to an initial value (in this embodiment, a value equivalent to 4.1 seconds).

In step S4804, 11H (see FIG. 9(a)) is set as the type information setting value, and in the subsequent step S4805, the value of the received command (the current number of bets in the game control unit 302) is set as the count information setting value. Ru. Here, the set information is later included in gaming machine information and transmitted to the rental machine 700.

In step S4806, game information setting processing is executed, and this start lever acceptance command reception processing is ended. Note that details of the game information setting process will be described later using FIG. 48.

In step S4807, information indicating "gaming interval abnormality" (error code E5) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4808, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 30 is executed, and this start lever acceptance command reception process is ended.

Next, details of the gaming information setting process (step S4806) in the start lever acceptance command receiving process in FIG. 47 and the gaming information setting process (step S4A19) in the payout command receiving process in FIG. 49 will be described using FIG. 48. This figure is a flowchart of the game information setting process (steps S4806 and S4A19) in FIGS. 47 and 49.

First, in step S4901 that is executed first, the number of game information is incremented by one.

In step S4902, if the number of game information is 1, the process proceeds to step S4903, and if the number of game information is not 1 (it is 2), the process proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4903, the value of the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 47 or step S4A14 in FIG. 49) is set as type information 1.

In step S4904, the value of the count information setting value is set as count information 1, and this game information setting process is ended. Here, if the value set in step S4804 of FIG. 47 is set as type information 1, the value set in step S4805 is set, and the value set in step S4A14 of FIG. 49 as type information 1 is set. is set, the value set in step S4A16 or step S4A18 is set.

In step S4905, the value of the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 47) is set as type information 2.

In step S4906, the value of the count information setting value (the value set in step S4805 in FIG. 47) is set as count information 2, and this game information setting process ends.

The type information 2 and the count information 2 are provided in order to transmit information about both of them in case the game is started quickly after the payout (within the transmission cycle to the lending machine 700). It is something that That is, when payout information (step S4A14, etc. in FIG. 49) is set in type information 1 and count information 1, information on the current number of bets (step S4804, etc. in FIG. 47) is set in type information 2 and count information 2. may be set to . Note that from the start of the game to the payout, the reels are rotated and stopped, and even if there is type information or count information during that time, it will be sent (cleared) to the lending machine 700, so the payout information may not be the type information. 2 and count information 2 is never set.

Next, details of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 43 and 44 will be explained using FIG. 49. This figure is a flowchart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 44.

First, in step S4A01 that is executed first, the game medal number clear detection information is cleared.

In step S4A02, if the payout command acquisition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4A03, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4A09.

In step S4A03, if the player wins in the replay, the process advances to step S4A04, and if the player does not win in the replay, the process advances to step S4A05.

In step S4A04, the additional value for the number of game medals is set to 0.

In step S4A05, information indicating "abnormal number of payout coins" (error code E4) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A06, if the value of the received command (the value included in the first command among the three commands) is 15 or less, the process proceeds to step S4A07, and if the same value is greater than 15, the process proceeds to step S4A10.

In step S4A07, the value of the number of payout medals is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the triple command).

In step S4A08, the additional value for the number of game medals is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands).

In step S4A09, information indicating "game order abnormality" (error code E2) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A10, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 30 is executed, and this payout command reception process is ended.

In step S4A11, a game medal number overflow confirmation process is executed. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 50.

In step S4A12, if the information of the response command indicates "normal", the process advances to step S4A13; otherwise, this payout command receiving process is ended.

In step S4A13, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF.

In step S4A14, 21H (see FIG. 9(a)) is set as the type information setting value.

In step S4A15, if the replay winning combination is won, the process proceeds to step S4A18, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4A16.

In step S4A16, the value of the received command (the value included in the first command of the three commands) is set as the count information setting value. Note that the first command of the payout commands here includes the number of coins to be paid out by the game control section 302, and this number of coins to be paid out is set in the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the rental machine 700 together with the type information setting value.

In step S4A17, the current bet amount is set to zero.

In step S4A18, the value of the current number of bets is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the rental machine 700 together with the type information setting value.

In step S4A19, the game information setting process shown in FIG. 48 is executed, and this payout command reception process is ended.

Next, details of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in the payout command reception process of FIG. 49 will be explained using FIG. 50. This figure is a flowchart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG. 49.

First, in step S4B01 that is executed first, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4B02, the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is set as the addition result.

In step S4B03, if the value of the addition result is 16383 or less, the process proceeds to step S4B04, and if the value of the addition result is greater than 16383, this game medal number overflow confirmation process is ended.

In step S4B04, the value of the addition result is set to the number of game medals.

In step S4B05, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this game medal number overflow confirmation process is ended.

Next, using FIG. 51, details of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 43 and 44 will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG.

First, in step S4C01 that is executed first, the error request is cleared. When an error occurrence command is received from the game control section 302, the error on the medal number control section 350 side is cleared by the processing here, so the error on the game control section 302 is processed with priority.

In step S4C02, if information (error code E1) indicating "gaming control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08; otherwise, the process advances to step S4C03.

In step S4C03, if information indicating "abnormality in the game order" (error code E2) is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08; otherwise, the process advances to step S4C04.

In step S4C04, if information (error code E3) indicating "gaming control command serial number abnormality" is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C05.

In step S4C05, if information indicating "medal number control RAM error" (error code E8) is set in the received command, the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C06.

In step S4C06, if information (error code E0) indicating "medal number control disconnection" is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08; otherwise, the process advances to step S4C07.

In step S4C07, if information indicating "defective game control RAM" (error code rE) is set in the received command, the process advances to step S4C08, otherwise, this error command reception process is ended.

In step S4C08, the game control command serial number update flag is set to ON, and this error occurrence command reception process is ended. By setting this flag on, the command serial number for determination is initialized (step S4508 in FIG. 43).

Next, details of the error monitoring process (step S407) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 37 will be described using FIG. 52. This figure is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4D01 which is executed first, if the value of the game control command disconnection timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D02, and if the same value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D02, information indicating "gaming control disconnection" (error code E1) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D03, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 30 is executed, and the process advances to step S4D04.

In step S4D04, if the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D05, and if the same value is not 1, this error monitoring process is ended.

In step S4D05, if the lending machine communication abnormality error setting flag is off, the process advances to step S4D06, and if the flag is on, this error monitoring process is ended.

In step S4D06, information indicating "rental machine communication abnormality" (error code E9) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D07, the error request setting process shown in FIG. 30 is executed, and this error monitoring process is ended.

Next, details of the medal number control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 37 will be explained using FIG. 53. This figure is a flowchart of the medal number control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4E01 that is executed first, the information of the VL signal is updated.

In step S4E02, if the above-mentioned power-on flag is off, the process advances to step S4E03, and if the flag is on, the process of transmitting the medal number control command to the game control unit is ended.

In step S4E03, if the value of the strobe counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S4E04, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4E09.

In step S4E04, some response command to be sent to the gaming control unit 302 (response command set in any of the input command reception process in FIG. 45, the settlement command reception process in FIG. 46, or the payout command reception process in FIG. 49) is set. If no response command has been set, the process advances to step S4E05, and if some response command has been set, the process advances to step S4E07.

In step S4E05, the command offset is repeatedly added and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 6 (1 after 6). In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the medal number control state command (six types of commands) described using FIG. 11 is repeatedly sent in order from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be sent.

In step S4E06, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information targeted by this command are read out to generate transmission contents, and the transmission contents are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302. When transmitting information on the number of game medals, this value is divided into an upper byte and a lower byte and transmitted using two of six types of commands; The value of the number of game medals acquired when transmitting the first command is used.

In step S4E07, the response command set in either the input command reception process of FIG. 45, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 46, or the payout command reception process of FIG. 49 is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302.

In step S4E08, the response command set in any of the input command reception processing of FIG. 45, the settlement command reception processing of FIG. 46, or the payout command reception processing of FIG. 49 is cleared.

In step S4E09, if the strobe counter value is 3 or less, the process proceeds to step S4E10, and if the same value is greater than 3, the process proceeds to step S4E11.

In step S4E10, the strobe signal addressed to the game control section 302 is set to ON.

In step S4E11, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302 are cleared.

In step S4E12, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to OFF, and the process advances to step S4E13.

In step S4E13, the value of the strobe counter is incremented by one. Note that this value is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 7 (0 after 7).

In step S4E14, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control section 302 are output to the game control section 302, and the process of transmitting the medal number control command to the game control section ends. Note that the information output here is received by the game control unit 302 side when the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to ON.

Next, details of the display display process (step S409) in the medal number control section timer interrupt process in FIG. 37 will be described using FIG. 54. This figure is a flowchart of the display processing (step S409) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4F01, which is executed first, if the value of the number of game medals is different from the value of the number of display game medals, the process proceeds to step S4F02, and if they are the same value, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F02, if the value of the discrete timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4F03, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F03, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F04, and if the value of the number of game medals is smaller than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F05.

In step S4F04, 1 is added to the value of the number of game medals for display.

In step S4F05, the value of the number of game medals for display is subtracted by 1.

In step S4F06, a value equivalent to 4 ms is set to the value of the discrete timer.

In step S4F07, the number of game medals for display is displayed, and this display display process is ended.

《Modification 1》
Here, a modification example (hereinafter referred to as modification 1) of the process related to medal insertion will be explained using FIGS. 55 to 57. 55 is a modification of the medal insertion process in FIG. 17, FIG. 56 is a modification of the triple command transmission process in FIG. 20, and FIG. 57 is a modification of the input command reception process in FIG. 45. be.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 55, among the processes shown in FIG. 17, step S1121 is provided between step S1107 and step S1108, and step S1122 is provided between step S1109 and step S1110. Further, steps S1112 and S1113 in FIG. 17 are deleted and step S1123 is provided. These processes will be explained below.

In step S1121, the input number limitation flag is set to ON.

In step S1122, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF.

In step S1123, the value of the response content is added to the value of the current bet amount.

In the modification shown in FIG. 56, step S1402 is deleted from the process shown in FIG. 20, and step S1421 is provided. This process will be explained below.

In step S1421, information on the requested number of medals and the input number limitation flag is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In the modification shown in FIG. 57, step S4603 of the processing shown in FIG. 45 is deleted. Moreover, steps S4621, S4622, and S4623 are newly provided beyond the route of No in the determination of step S4604, and furthermore, step S4608 is deleted and step S4624 is provided. These processes will be explained below.

In step S4621, information on the input number limitation flag included in the received command (the first command among the three commands) is referred to, and if the flag is off, the process advances to step S4622, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4622. The process advances to step S4623.

In step S4622, for the received command value that stores the value of the requested number of medals included in the received command (the first command among the three commands), that value is set as the value of the number of game medals, and the process advances to step S4605.

In step S4623, the received command value that stores the value of the requested number of sheets included in the received command (the first command among the three commands) is set to 0, and the process advances to step S4624.

In step S4624, the received command value is set in the response command, and this submitted command reception processing is ended.

《Modification 2》
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 2) of the scheduled count number update process will be described using FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a modification of the scheduled counting number update process of FIG. 40.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 58, step S4204 of the processing shown in FIG. 40 is deleted. Further, step S4206 is deleted and step S4221 is provided, and further, step S4209 is deleted and step S4222 is provided. These processes will be explained below.

In step S4221, the value of the long press timer is set according to the press time of the count button 171.

In step S4222, the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is set according to the pressing time of the counting button 171.

《Modification 3》
Here, a modified example (hereinafter referred to as modified example 3) of the scheduled count number update process will be described using FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a modification of the scheduled counting number update process of FIG. 40.

First, in the modification shown in FIG. 59, steps S4231 and S4232 are provided before step S4207 in the process shown in FIG. Moreover, steps S4233 and S4234 are newly provided after the route of No in the determination of step S4207, and steps S4235 and S4236 are further provided before step S4210. Furthermore, step S4237 is provided after step S4215. These processes will be explained below.

In step S4231, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 0, the process advances to step S4232, and if the same value is not 0, the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4232, the value of the automatic counting timer is set to a value equivalent to 2.0 seconds, and the process advances to step S4207.

In step S4233, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4234, and if the same value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4235.

In step S4234, the automatic counting flag is set to on, and the process advances to step S4208.

In step S4235, if the automatic counting flag is off, the process advances to step S4210, and if the flag is on, the process advances to step S4236.

In step S4236, if the value of the number of game medals is 0, the process proceeds to step S4213, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4237, the automatic counting flag is set to OFF, and this process of updating the scheduled number of sheets to be counted ends.

<<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 60. Note that FIG. 60(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 60(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 60(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S501, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S501. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. In this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S503, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S505.

In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control section 302, is executed. Note that details of this command processing will be described later using FIG. 60(d).

In step S509, production control processing is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made according to the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S511, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S513, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S509, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S515, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a command for shutter control in the effect data read in step S509, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S517, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S509, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S503.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 60(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the game control unit 302. In step S521 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the game control unit 302 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 60(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S531, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 60(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S533, the device data is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S515, and the random value for effect is updated.

Next, details of the command processing (step S507) in the first sub-control unit main processing of FIG. 60(a) will be described using FIG. 60(d). This figure is a flowchart of command processing (step S507) in FIG. 60(a).

First, in step S541 that is executed first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S543; otherwise, this command processing is ended.

In step S543, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control section 302, is executed.

<<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 61. Note that FIG. 61(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 61(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 61(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 61(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 61(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S601. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, etc. are performed.

In step S603, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S605.

In step S605, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S607, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S609, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S609, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 61(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S603.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 61(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S615 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 61(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S617, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 61(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S619, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S611 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 61(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S621, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S623, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S625; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S625, parameter settings are performed based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S621, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S627, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S629, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input, and if the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S631; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S631, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

《Operation explanation》
The operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be explained below.

[Operation when power is turned on]
In the medal number control unit 350, the contents of the RAM are backed up when the power is turned off. If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, normal RAM clearing processing is performed and the state returns to the state when the power was turned off (Yes in step S3003 in FIG. 28). Note that when the power is turned on for the first time, it is in the initial state.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, all RAM is cleared (No determination in step S3003 in FIG. 28). Furthermore, by storing information indicating "RAM defect" in the RAM defect information, information indicating "RAM defect" (error code E8) is set in the error request (Yes in step S3006 and step S3020 in FIG. 28). determination, step S3102 in FIG. 30). This error information is transmitted to the game control section 302 (FIG. 53), and error notification based on this information is executed (step S1002 in FIGS. 25 and 16). Note that even if the game control section 302 receives an error from the medal number control section 350, the contents of the RAM are not cleared. Furthermore, in the medal number control unit 350, by setting the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag to on, various information is updated (initialized) when receiving the game control unit status command (FIG. 28 (Yes in step S3007 and step S4407 in FIG. 42).

Further, when the power is turned on, a RAM clear command may be transmitted from the game control unit 302 (step S101 in FIG. 15). The medal number control unit 350 that has received this RAM clear command employs a configuration that clears the RAM in response to the RAM clear command from the game control unit 302 (determination of Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 28). At this time, the medal number control unit 350 once permits the interrupt process, and then, upon receiving a command from the game control unit 302, disables the interrupt process and performs the subsequent process. The process upon reception can be reliably executed (steps S3012 to S3014 in FIG. 28). Furthermore, by setting the power-on flag to OFF while interrupts are permitted, the counting process by operating the counting button 171 is not executed (steps S3011 and S3015 in FIG. 28).

In addition, in the medal number control unit 350, the number of game medals can be initialized by operating the number of game medals clear button 172 when the power is turned on (determination of Yes in step S3008 in FIG. 28). At this time, information indicating "detected" is set in the gaming medal number clear detection information, but while this information is set, information regarding this clearing is included in the gaming machine information notification and the rental machine 700 (Figure 32). Note that the game medal count clear detection information is cleared when a payout command is received from the game control unit 302 (step S4A01 in FIG. 49).

[Game control status command transmission (regular transmission from game control unit 302 to medal number control unit 350)]
In the slot machine 100, 41 types of game control status commands (see FIG. 10) are transmitted to the medal number control unit 350. Specifically, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the game control unit timer interrupt process of the game control unit 302, the game control status commands are sent one by one to the medal number control unit. It is set in the buffer (Yes in step S2201 of FIG. 26). However, if the game control priority command is first set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

After the game control status command and the game control priority command are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350, the contents of this transmission buffer are output and the strobe signal is set on (step S2208 in FIG. 26). ). By setting this strobe signal to ON, the medal number control unit 350 side receives a command. Note that the strobe signal is set to OFF in the next interrupt processing and the contents of the transmission buffer are also cleared (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 26), but the output from the I/O port remains unchanged. . This makes it possible to more stably receive commands on the medal number control unit 350 side. When the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared, the contents of the transmission buffer are updated in order to transmit a new command in the next interrupt process (Yes in step S2201 in FIG. 26). That is, in the game control unit 302, one command is transmitted while two interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched each time one interrupt process is executed. In addition, while the transmission state continues for 1.49ms (however, the command output itself continues for 2.98ms), the gaming control unit 302 has two reception timings (interrupt processing of 0.745ms is performed twice). Therefore, it is possible to prevent commands from being missed.

[Transmission of game control priority command (interrupt transmission from game control unit 302 to medal number control unit 350)]
In the game control unit 302, a game control status command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the timer interrupt process, but the game control priority command gives priority to the medal number control unit 350 depending on the game status in the game control unit main process. It is transmitted to the number control section 350. More specifically, when the transmission buffer becomes empty in the game control command transmission process (FIG. 26), the game control command transmission process is executed in the next timer interrupt process (the next game control status command is By setting the gaming control priority command in the transmission buffer in the gaming control unit main processing before the game control state command is set in the transmission buffer, this gaming control priority command is sent to the medal number control unit with priority over the gaming control status command. 350. The game control priority commands include the input command associated with the operation of inserting game medals, the settlement command associated with the operation of adjusting the game medals currently set in the number of bets, the start lever reception command associated with acceptance of start lever operation, and the input command associated with the operation of adjusting the game medals currently set in the number of bets. There are payout commands associated with payout, error occurrence commands associated with error occurrence, and RAM clear commands associated with RAM clearing (FIG. 13(a)).

Among the game control priority commands, the input command, settlement command, and payout command each consist of three commands. The first command is a command that includes information on the number of target game medals, the second command is a command that includes the communication number (command serial number) of the game control priority command, and the third command is a command that includes information on the number of target game medals. This is a command that includes a checksum based on the contents of two commands. These commands are sometimes referred to as triple commands because they are transmitted consecutively without being interrupted by other commands. Furthermore, the values of the upper bytes of the triple command are consecutive values.

Note that if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 is not received, or if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 includes information indicating “request”, the command is retransmitted. (No determination in step S1308 in FIG. 19, No determination in step S1310) exceeds the upper limit number of retransmissions, information indicating "abnormality" is set as a response result from the medal number control unit 350. (No determination in step S1302 and step S1306).

Furthermore, if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 includes information other than “request”, this information is set in the response result from the medal control unit, and the command sequence number is incremented by 1 (see Figure 19 steps S1311 and S1312).

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to input operation (transmission of input command, etc.)]
When the game medal insertion operation is performed, the number of game medals (requested number) required by this operation is determined (steps S1105 to S1109 in FIG. 17). In this embodiment, two types of bet buttons, the 1 bet button and the MAX bet button, can be used to perform the placing operation. If the MAX bet button is operated, the number of game medals required to set the maximum bet amount is set to the requested number (step S1107 in FIG. 17), and if the 1 bet button is operated, 1 is set to the requested number of medals. is set (step S1109 in FIG. 17). However, if the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets, the required number of coins is set to 0 by the insertion operation (No determination in step S1106 in FIG. 17).

Next, a command (the first of the commands that make up the input command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is an input command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of medals is addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1110 and S1111 in FIG. 17, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 20, and FIG. 21). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is first set in the transmission buffer. The command being displayed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

After that, when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interrupt process (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 26), the checksum is updated, and the upper byte data is added to 1. The command is added and updated to a value indicating the second command, and the command consisting of the lower byte data indicating the command serial number (the second of the commands that make up the input command) is sent to the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350. is set (steps S1404 to S1407 in FIG. 20, FIG. 21). Then, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the next game control unit timer interrupt process, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the next game control unit timer interrupt process When the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process (No determination in step S2208 in FIG. 26), the checksum is updated, and 1 is added to the upper byte data to indicate the third command. At the same time, a command consisting of lower byte data indicating the checksum (the third of the commands composing the input command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 (step S1408 in FIG. 20). ~S1411, Figure 21). Then, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the next game control unit timer interrupt process, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

The input command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the above-described flow, but if the response command to this command includes information indicating that it is "normal", the requested number of medals is added to the current bet value. is added (Yes in step S1112 of FIG. 17).

In addition, in the case where a re-game combination is won and a re-game is awarded (the re-game flag is on), the process of the above input command is not executed (No determination in step S1104 in FIG. 17).

In addition, even if the bet button is operated, the input command is not sent from the time the input command is sent until the response command is received from the medal number control unit 350 (step S1112 in FIG. 17 receives the response command). ).

Further, when the bet button is operated, the command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 regardless of whether a response command to the input command is received or the content of the response command from the medal number control unit 350. (Step S1114 in FIG. 17). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the bet button.

[Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payment operation (transmission of payment command, etc.)]
When the insertion operation is performed, the current number of bets is added accordingly, but by operating the settlement button 134 (settlement operation), the game medals set to the current number of bets can be settled.

When the settlement operation is performed, the value of the current number of bets is set as the number of game medals (requested number) requested in the settlement operation (No in step S1101 in FIG. 17, step S1203 in FIG. 18).

Next, a command (the first of the commands that make up the payment command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a settlement command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of coins is sent to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1204 and S1205 in FIG. 18, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 20, and FIG. 21). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is first set in the transmission buffer. The command being displayed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

Subsequently, the second and third commands of the commands that make up the settlement command are transmitted, but since the processing is the same as that for the input command, the explanation will be omitted.

A settlement command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the above flow, but if the response command to this command includes information indicating that it is "normal", the current value of the number of bets becomes 0. is set (Yes in step S1206 in FIG. 18).

In the above example, the current bet value becomes 0 after receiving the response command (if a response command indicating "normal" is received, the current bet value is subtracted). Therefore, in the state before receiving the response command, the value of the current bet number has not been subtracted. On the other hand, since the number of game medals is added to the number of game medals in the medal number control unit 350 that has received the settlement command, the number of game medals owned by the player is temporarily increased at this point. If a response command indicating "normality" is not received, the current bet value will not be subtracted and an error will occur (No determination in step S1206 in FIG. 18), but this error can be avoided by some means. Then, since the value of the current number of bets is not subtracted, as a result, the number of medals increases by the amount that the number of game medals is added by the medal number control unit 350, and game medals are fraudulently acquired by the settlement operation. It turns out. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the value of the current number of bets is set to 0 before and after sending the settlement command, and a response command to the settlement command is not waited for (response command is not used). Note that in a configuration that does not use response commands, there is a risk that errors in the communication status may not be detected, but by using a configuration that uses response commands for input commands, errors in the communication status can be detected, so communication quality will not deteriorate. You can do it like this. Note that a command index may be managed between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350, and an error may be determined when the number of mismatches reaches a predetermined number (eg, 5 times). According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent operations based on incorrect information from being performed.

Note that when the medal number control unit 350 receives a payment command that includes information on the number of medals exceeding the number of inserted medals, the payment may not be accepted and an error may be detected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game medals from being fraudulently acquired.

Note that when the medal number control unit 350 receives a payment command that includes information on the number of medals exceeding 16, it may not accept the payment and may treat it as an error. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game medals from being fraudulently acquired.

Note that when the medal number control unit 350 receives a payment command including information on the number of medals exceeding 16,384, the payment may not be accepted and an error may be detected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent game medals from being fraudulently acquired.

In addition, in the case where a re-game combination is won and a re-game is awarded (the re-game flag is on), the processing of the above-mentioned settlement command is not executed (No determination in step S1202 in FIG. 18).

Furthermore, when the payment button 134 is operated, a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 regardless of whether or not a payment command is sent or the content of the response command from the medal number control unit 350 ( Step S1201 in FIG. 18). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the payment button 134.

[Operation of the game control unit 302 due to start lever operation (transmission of start lever reception command, etc.)]
If the start lever is operated while the current bet value is greater than or equal to the startable number, the upper byte data indicating that it is a start lever acceptance command and the lower byte data indicating the current bet value. A command consisting of (start lever acceptance command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 (steps S1012 to S1014 in FIG. 16). Furthermore, a start lever acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1014 in FIG. 16). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the start lever.

[Operation of game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]
When the game ends and a payout winning combination is won, the value of the payout number is set to the number of game medals required for payout (requested number of medals) (step S1602 in FIG. 22). Next, a command (the first of the commands constituting the payout command) consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a payout command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number of medals is addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 20, and FIG. 21). When the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is first set in the transmission buffer. The command being displayed is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

Subsequently, the second and third commands of the commands that make up the payout command are transmitted, but since the processing is the same as the input command, the explanation will be omitted.

The payout command is sent to the medal number control unit 350 in the above flow, but if the response command to this command includes information indicating that it is “normal”, the payout command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. A command is transmitted (step S1607 in FIG. 22). The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command can execute an effect corresponding to the payout.

On the other hand, if the response command is "abnormal" and nothing is set in the error request, the number of game medals has overflowed and the payout cannot be accepted, so the command indicating this state is The information is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1608 in FIG. 22). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received this command can perform an effect corresponding to the overflow. Note that if the overflow condition is not resolved, the retransmission of the payout command is repeated and the game becomes unable to proceed. In this case, the overflow state can be resolved by operating the count button 171. Once the overflow condition is resolved, the performance corresponding to the payout is executed and the game can be played. That is, if the game cannot proceed due to an overflow, the player can deal with the situation by himself without calling a store clerk.

[Operation when receiving medal number control command]
When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal number control unit 350 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S2101 in FIG. 25), it determines the type of this command (game control status command (FIG. 11) or response command (FIG. 13). (b)), and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated according to the type of command (step S2102 in FIG. 25).The response commands for the input command, settlement command, and payout command are the contents updated here. In addition, if the command received here is a command that includes an error code, this error code indicates an error in the game control unit 302, provided that the error status in the game control unit 302 is not set. The status is set (step S2104 in FIG. 25).

[Transmission of medal number control command (from medal number control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]
In the slot machine 100, six types of medal number control state commands (see FIG. 11) are transmitted to the game control unit 302. Specifically, by the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of the medal number control unit 350 that sends a medal number control command to the game control unit (step S408 in FIG. 37, FIG. 53), one medal number control state command is sent. The game controller is sequentially set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit (Yes in step S4E04 in FIG. 53). However, if the response command is first set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302, the medal number control state command is not set in the transmission buffer (No determination in step S4E04 of FIG. 53).

The medal number control state command and response command set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are then output to the game control unit 302 (step S4E14 in FIG. 53). In this state, if the strobe signal is set to ON (step S4E10 in FIG. 53), the command will be received on the game control section 302 side. In addition, in managing the on/off of the strobe signal, a strobe counter that is incremented by 1 for each interrupt in the range of 0 to 7 is used, and when the strobe counter is between 0 and 3, it is set to on. It is set to off between 4 and 7 (steps S4E09 and S4E13 in FIG. 53). Note that the transmission buffer is updated when the strobe counter is 0 (step S4E03 in FIG. 53). In other words, in the medal number control unit 350, one command is transmitted while eight interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched every four interrupt processes. . In addition, while the transmission state continues for 2.98ms (0.745ms x 4 times), the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (two 1.49ms interrupt processing), so the command It is possible to prevent omissions.

[Operation when receiving game control status command]
When the medal number control section 350 receives a command from the game control section 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 41), if this command is a game control state command, the game control state command reception process (FIG. 41) is performed. Step S4304 (FIG. 42) is executed.

41 types of game control status commands (FIG. 10) are sequentially transmitted, but the 1st to 40th commands are temporarily stored in a buffer and the checksum is updated (if no in step S4401 of FIG. 42) judgment). When the 41st command (checksum) is received, if the contents are normal, the checksum is cleared and the RAM is updated based on the information temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4406 in FIG. 42, S4410-S4413). However, when updating the gaming machine installation information buffer, role ratio monitor information buffer, and gaming machine performance information buffer, it is executed when the chip ID stored in RAM and the chip ID in the gaming machine installation information buffer match. (Yes in step S4409 of FIG. 42). Note that if the IDs do not match, error code E7 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4409 in FIG. 42). In addition, if all RAM is cleared in the medal number control unit 350, the chip ID stored in the RAM has been cleared, so in this case, as an exception, the above chip ID check is not performed. The update process is executed (the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is turned on in FIG. 28, and the determination is No in step S4407 in FIG. 42).

[Operation when receiving game control priority command]
When the medal number control unit 350 receives a command from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 41), if this command is a game control priority command, the game control priority command reception process (FIG. 41) is performed. Step S4305, FIG. 43, FIG. 44) is executed.

First, if the game control priority command is not a triple command (RAM clear command, start lever reception command, error occurrence command), processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 44).

On the other hand, if the game control priority command is a triple command (input command, settlement command, payout command), the first and second commands are temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4503 in FIG. 43), and the third command is If so, the checksum value included in this command is compared with the checksum calculated from the contents previously stored in the buffer, and if it is abnormal, information indicating "request" is sent as a response command. (Steps S4504 to S4606 in FIG. 43).

Next, if the gaming control command serial number update flag is on, the gaming control command serial number is updated to the value of the command serial number stored in the reception buffer, and the gaming control command serial number updating flag is set to off (Fig. 43 (Yes determination in step S4507). Note that the game control command serial number update flag is a flag that is set to ON in order to prevent a situation in which an error in the command serial number occurs separately after the error has been resolved (FIG. 51).

Next, it is determined whether the game control command serial number and the command serial number stored in the reception buffer match (step S4510 in FIG. 43). Since both the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 increment the command serial number by 1 (step S1312 in FIG. 19, step S4511 in FIG. 43), these values will match if there is no abnormality. Note that if these values do not match, error code E3 is set to the error request (No determination in step S4510 in FIG. 43).

After the above processing, processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 44).

[Operation when receiving input command]
If the received game control priority command is an input command, input command reception processing is executed (step S4517 in FIG. 44, FIG. 45). In this process, if the value included in the input command (hereinafter referred to as the requested number of coins) is within the number of game medals, the requested number of coins is added to the number of medals inserted, the requested number of coins is added to the current number of bets, After the number of game medals requested to be inserted is subtracted from the number of game medals, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 45). Note that if the requested number of coins to be inserted is larger than the number of game medals, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (No determination in steps S4603 and S4604 in FIG. 45). Note that the value of the number of inserted medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 32).

Note that while the counting notification transmission process is being executed, the input prohibition flag is set on (step S3509 in FIG. 34), and when this flag is on, information indicating "re-request" is included in the response command. is set (No determination in steps S4601 and S4602 in FIG. 45).

[Operation when receiving payment command]
If the received game control priority command is a settlement command, settlement command reception processing is executed (step S4519 in FIG. 44, FIG. 46). In this process, the value included in the settlement command (hereinafter referred to as the number of coins requested for settlement) is subtracted from the current bet amount (step S4701 in FIG. 46). If the current value of the number of bets is 0, the number of coins requested for settlement is subtracted from the number of inserted medals, the number of coins requested for settlement is added to the number of gaming medals, and then information indicating "normal" is set in the response command. (Yes in step S4702 of FIG. 46). Note that the value of the number of inserted medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 32). Note that if the current bet number is not 0, error code E6 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4702 of FIG. 46).

[Operation when receiving start lever reception command]
If the received game control priority command is a start lever acceptance command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON (step S4801 in FIG. 47). If this flag is not set to on, an error may occur in the subsequent payout command reception process, and fraud prevention may be discovered. Next, if the value of the game interval abnormality timer is 0 (determination of Yes in step S4802 in FIG. 47), the initial value is set in the game interval abnormality timer (step S4803 in FIG. 47), and further, game information is set. The processing to do so is executed (steps S4804 to S4806 in FIG. 47). Here, 11H is set as the type information setting value, and this value indicates reception of the start lever. Further, the current bet amount is set in the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals used by reception of the start lever is stored as game information. Note that the gaming information is information used for gaming machine information transmitted to the rental machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 32). Note that if the game interval abnormality timer is not 0, error code E5 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4802 in FIG. 47). This game interval abnormal timer is a timer similar to the game interval counter (step S106 in FIG. 15) in the game control unit 302, but by using this timer in the medal number control unit 350 separately from the game control unit 302, Preventing fraud.

[Operation when receiving a payout command]
If the received game control priority command is a payout command, first the game medal number clear detection information is cleared. This information is set by operating the game medal number clear button 172 when the power is turned on, but the configuration is such that this information is sent to the lending machine 700 until it is cleared upon reception of this payout command. ing.

Next, if the payout command acquisition flag is not on, error code E2 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4A02 of FIG. 49). This flag is set to ON when the start lever reception command is received, so if this flag is OFF, it means that the payout command has been received even though the start lever reception command has not been received. Used to prevent fraud.

Next, if the player has won a prize in the re-game, the additional value for the number of game medals is set to 0 (step S4A04 in FIG. 49). In cases other than replay winnings, if the value included in the payout command (hereinafter referred to as the number of paid out coins) is 15 or less, the value of the number of paid out coins is set to the number of paid out medals and the additional value of the number of game medals, respectively (Fig. 49 steps S4A07, S4A08). Note that the value of the number of payout medals is a value used in gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3309 in FIG. 32). Note that if the number of coins to be paid out is greater than 15, error code E4 is set as an error request (No determination in step S4A05 and step S4A06 in FIG. 49).

Subsequently, a game medal number overflow confirmation process is executed (step S4A11 in FIG. 49, FIG. 50). Here, if the total value of the number of game medals and the additional value of the number of game medals is less than or equal to 16383, which is the upper limit for the number of game medals for payout, this total value is set as the number of game medals, and "normal" is indicated in the response command. The information is set (Yes in step S4B03 of FIG. 50). On the other hand, if the total value is greater than the upper limit for the number of game medals, the number of game medals is maintained as is, and information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (No determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 50). In addition, regarding the determination of the number of game medals here, as described later (see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal number control unit 350)]), in actual operation, the number of game medals is equal to the actual threshold value. If it exceeds the actual threshold value, it cannot be increased by dispensing (response command ``abnormal''), and if it does not exceed the actual threshold value, it can be increased by dispensing (response command ``normal''). Any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (16383 in this embodiment); for example, the actual threshold value does not need to be the same as the determination value in the process.

If information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command in the game medal number overflow confirmation process, the payout command reception process ends and this response command is sent to the game control unit 302.

On the other hand, if information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF (step S4A13 in FIG. 49). Furthermore, processing for setting game information is executed (steps S4A14 to S4A19 in FIG. 49). Here, 21H is set as the type information setting value, and this value indicates that there has been a payout. Further, the number of coins to be paid out (the current number of bets in the case of replay winnings) is set as the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals obtained by payout is stored as game information. Note that the gaming information is information used for gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and the number of pieces of this information is initialized each time gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 32).

[Game machine information notification (regularly sent from medal number control unit 350 to rental machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, gaming machine information notification is transmitted in the medal number control unit main processing (step S304 in FIG. 27, FIG. 32). This gaming machine information notification is configured to be executed at approximately 300 ms intervals by a gaming machine information notification interval timer (steps S3301 and S3302 in FIG. 32). In addition, 90 ms is set to the count notification interval timer for adjusting the time until the count notification executed after the transmission of this gaming machine information notification (step S3303 in FIG. 32).

Next, the value of the current number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for counting and determination. In the slot machine 100, since the number of game medals may change when performing the counting process (transferring the number of game medals from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700), the value for the counting process is temporarily changed. is set as the number of game medals for count determination (step S3304 in FIG. 32).

Next, the gaming machine information type is acquired (step S3305 in FIG. 32, FIG. 33). The gaming machine information notification includes gaming machine information, and one of three types of gaming machine information is selected: gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, and hall console/fraud monitoring information (Figure 8 (b)). Specifically, when the gaming machine information type is 0, gaming machine performance information is selected, when it is 1, gaming machine installation information is selected, and when it is 2, hole console/fraud monitoring information is selected. Here, one of 0, 1, and 2 is set as the gaming machine information type using the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer and the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer (FIG. 33). In this embodiment, the gaming machine information type is set to 1 at approximately 60-second intervals, 0 is set to the gaming machine information type at approximately 180-second intervals, and 2 is set to the gaming machine information type at other times. . In other words, in gaming machine information notifications with a cycle of about 300 ms, the gaming machine information mainly includes hole control and fraud monitoring information, but gaming machine installation information is included in the gaming machine information at intervals of about 60 seconds, and about 180 seconds. Gaming machine performance information is included in the gaming machine information at intervals. Data to be notified of gaming machine information (FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b)), including gaming machine information according to these gaming machine information types, is set in the sending buffer to the lending machine (step S3306 in FIG. 32). ), are transmitted sequentially (steps S3311 to S3317 in FIG. 32). Note that the gaming machine information serial number is updated at the time of this transmission (step S3318 in FIG. 32).

In addition, the hole console/fraud monitoring information corresponding to gaming machine information type 2 includes gaming information according to the number of inserted medals, the number of paid out medals, and the number of gaming information, but this information is not sent to the lending machine. After being set in the buffer, it is initialized in preparation for the next transmission (Yes in step S3307 in FIG. 32).

[Count notification (regularly sent from medal number control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, a count notification is transmitted in the medal number control unit main processing (step S305 in FIG. 27, FIG. 34). This count notification transmission process is configured to be executed 90 ms after the start of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S3303 in FIG. 32, step S3501 in FIG. 34).

In the counting notification transmission process, the data to be notified of the counting (FIGS. 8(a) and 8(c)) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the rental machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3503 to S3505, S3513, and S3518 in FIG. 34). , S3519). Note that the counting sequence number is updated during this transmission (step S3520 in FIG. 34).

This count notification includes information on the number of sheets to be counted, but if the scheduled number of sheets to be counted is 0, 0 is transmitted as the number of sheets to be counted (No determination in step S3508 in FIG. 34, step S3513). In this case, the number of game medals does not change (step S3514 in FIG. 34). On the other hand, if the number of tokens to be counted is set to a value other than 0, the number of tokens to be counted is set based on this value (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 34), and the number of game medals is further subtracted (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 34). step S3514). Note that the setting of the number of coins to be counted and the subtraction of the number of game medals are executed in a state where the insertion operation is prohibited (steps S3509 and S3516 in FIG. 34). The scheduled number of medals to be counted is set in the scheduled number of medals to be counted update process of the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S405 in FIG. 37, FIG. 40).

[Setting of planned number of medals to be counted (number of medals control unit 350)]
In the medal number control unit 350, the scheduled number of medals to be counted is updated in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S405 in FIG. 37, FIG. 40). In this process, the number of sheets to be counted is determined based on the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, and a count notification containing this information is sent to the lending machine 700.

First, a case where the counting button 171 is pressed for less than 500 ms will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 40), but since the count button 171 is released before the value of the timer reaches 1 (500 ms have passed since it was pressed), the count The long press flag is not set to on (Yes is not determined in step S4207 of FIG. 40). When the counting button 171 is released in this state, 1 is added to the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (Yes in step S4210 of FIG. 40, step S4212).

Next, a case where the counting button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or more will be described. In this case, the initial value is set to the count long press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 40), and when the value of the timer becomes 1 (500ms have passed since the press was pressed), the count long press flag is set to ON and the count is started. The planned number of sheets is set to 50 (Yes in step S4207 of FIG. 40). After that, as long as the counting button 171 is kept pressed with the counting long press flag turned on, the process of setting the scheduled number of sheets to be counted to 50 is repeated, and each time a counting notification is sent, the number of sheets to be counted is based on this scheduled number of sheets. will be set. On the other hand, if you release the counting button 171 while the count long press flag is on, the count long press flag is set to OFF, the count long press timer is set to 0, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted is cleared (step S4210 in FIG. 40). Yes is determined in step S4211, and No is determined in step S4211).

[Rental notification (regularly sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]
When the medal number control unit 350 receives the lending notification from the lending machine 700, the contents of the RAM are updated based on the contents of the lending notification (step S4003 in FIG. 38). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculated from the rental notification and the checksum included in the rental notification match (steps S4102 and S4103 in FIG. 39). Next, it is determined whether the confirmation lending serial number of the medal number control unit 350 and the lending serial number included in the lending notification match (step S4104 in FIG. 39). Note that the confirmation lending serial number is a value obtained by adding 1 to the lending serial number included in the previously received lending notice (step S3706 in FIG. 36), and the configuration is such that these match if the communication is normal. has been done. Furthermore, it is determined whether the message length and command data are normal. If an abnormality is determined in these determinations, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

Following the above determination, if the number of rental sheets included in the rental notification is 0, the determination result is set to "normal" (determination of Yes in step S4106 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, if the number of lending sheets is not 0, the following determination is further executed (No determination in step S4106 in FIG. 39).

First, if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4107 in FIG. 39). In this embodiment, if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, it is configured such that it cannot be increased by lending. In this configuration, if the number of game medals exceeds 14,999, the number cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed 14,999 (if it is 14,999 or less), it can be increased by lending. In order to realize this operation, for example, if the number is 15,000 or more, the increase due to lending is restricted, and if the number is 14,999 or less, the increase due to lending is possible. It will behave the same. Further, if the number is 14999 or less, it is possible to increase the number by lending, and in other cases, even if the increase by lending is restricted, the same operation as in this embodiment is performed. As described above, in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold (14,999 in the above case), the number of game medals cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed the actual threshold, it can be increased by lending. , it is sufficient that there exists a value that is the actual threshold value, and any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (15000 in this embodiment).For example, the actual threshold value does not need to be the same as the determination value in the process. do not have.

Alternatively, the above determination may be made based on the added number of game medals instead of the current number of game medals. However, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which there is a value that is an actual threshold value that includes the number of game medals to be added to the current number of game medals. That is, this configuration can also be said to be such that in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold, the number cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed the actual threshold, it can be increased by lending.

Next, if the gaming machine information type is not 2, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4108 in FIG. 39). This embodiment is configured to accept lending when the gaming machine information type is set to 2.

Next, if the counted number is not 0, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4109 in FIG. 39). If the counted number is not 0, the number of game medals is subtracted, and if the number of loaned medals is not 0, the number of game medals is added, so this embodiment is configured so that these processes do not coexist.

Finally, if the number of lending sheets is greater than 50, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4110 in FIG. 39). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of sheets lent at one time is set to 50.

If the above determination does not indicate an abnormality, the determination result is set to "normal" (Yes determination in steps S4107 to S4110 in FIG. 39).

The determination result of the above process is set as the rental number receipt result, and the rental notification reception flag is set on (steps S4005 and S4006 in FIG. 38).

In addition to the above lending notification reception process, the medal number control section 350 executes a lending notification reception confirmation process in the medal number control section main processing (step S306 in FIG. 27, FIG. 35). In this rental notification reception confirmation process, it is confirmed whether the rental notification reception flag is on for 170ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process (step S3502 in FIG. 34, steps S3601 and S3602 in FIG. 35). . This lending notification reception flag is set in the lending notification receiving process of the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S404 in FIG. 37, FIG. 38).

Even though the VL signal is on, if the rental notification reception flag is not turned on by the time 170ms elapses from the start of the counting notification transmission process, the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1 ( Step S3604 in FIG. 35). The value of this rental machine communication abnormality counter is initialized when executing the rental machine reception result response transmission (step S3701 in FIG. 36), but when the value of the rental machine communication abnormality counter reaches 1, an error occurs (Fig. 52 steps S4D06, S4D07).

[Rental receipt result response (periodically transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, after the lending notification reception confirmation process, if the lending notification reception flag is set to on, the lending reception result response transmission process is executed in the medal number control unit main processing (steps in FIG. 27). S308, Figure 36).

In this rental reception result response transmission process, parameters related to rental machine communication abnormality are initialized (steps S3701 and S3702 in FIG. 36).

Subsequently, if the lending number receipt result is set to "normal", the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notification is set to the normal lending serial number (step S3704 in FIG. 36). Further, after the value of the lending serial number included in the received lending notice is set as the confirmation lending serial number, 1 is added to the value of the confirmation lending serial number (steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 36). That is, the value of the confirmation lending serial number here is the same value as the value of the lending serial number scheduled to be included in the next lending notification.

Subsequently, the data (FIGS. 3A and 3E) that is the object of the rental receipt result response is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the rental machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3707 to S37011 in FIG. 36). Through the above process, if the result of receiving the number of borrowed sheets is "normal", the currently received loan serial number will be sent; if the result of receiving the number of loaned sheets is "abnormal", the previously received loan serial number will be sent. . Note that if the result of receiving the number of loaned medals is "normal", the value of the number of loaned medals is added to the number of game medals after this transmission is completed (determination of Yes in step S3712 in FIG. 36).

[Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]
The game control unit 302 determines various errors (step S203 in FIG. 23). For example, if a strobe signal during command transmission from the medal number control unit 350 is not detected for a certain period of time, a medal number control disconnection error is set in the error status (FIG. 24). In a state where the error status is not set in the game control section 302, the error status is set based on the error code of the medal number control section 350. If an error status is set, a process for notifying that an error has occurred is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 16, step S1603 in FIG. 22). Therefore, an error on the game control section 302 side is processed with priority over an error on the medal number control section 350 side. For example, if there is no error on the game control section 302 side, an error on the medal number control section 350 side is notified. will be done. Further, the error status is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 by an error occurrence command (step S203 in FIG. 23).

[Operation in response to error (medal number control unit 350)]
In the medal number control unit 350, if it is determined that an error has occurred, an error code is set in the error request (step S3021 in FIG. 28, step S4414 in FIG. 42, step S4512 in FIG. 43, step S4706 in FIG. 47, Step S4807, Step S4A05 in FIG. 49, Step S4A09 in FIG. 49, Step S4D02 in FIG. 52, Step S4D06 in FIG. 52, and FIG. 30). This error code information is transmitted to the game control section 302 by the medal number control state command. Note that when an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error request is cleared (step S4C01 in FIG. 51). Thereby, the configuration is such that an error on the game control section 302 side is processed more preferentially than an error on the medal number control section 350 side.

[Modified example of input operation]
55 is a modification of the medal insertion process in FIG. 17, FIG. 56 is a modification of the triple command transmission process in FIG. 20, and FIG. 57 is a modification of the input command reception process in FIG. 45. be. The operations performed by these processes will be described below.

In the process of inserting medals in FIG. 17, the requested number of medals is determined according to the operated bet buttons 130, 132 and the current number of bets, and an insert command including this information is sent to the medal number control unit 350. (Figure 20). On the other hand, in FIG. 55, when the MAX bet button (bet button 132) is operated, the number-of-insertion limit flag is set to ON (step S1121 in FIG. 55), and the 1 bet button (bet button 130) is operated. If so, the input number limitation flag is set to OFF (step S1122 in FIG. 55). Then, an input command including information on the input number limitation flag is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (FIG. 56).

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 57, if there is a number of game medals greater than or equal to the requested number, this requested number is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet amount, and the requested number is subtracted from the number of game medals, and the value of the requested number is The response command is returned to the game control unit 302 (Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 57). The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current number of bets (step S1123 in FIG. 55).

In the input command reception process of FIG. 57, if there is no number of game medals equal to or greater than the requested number, the input number limitation flag is referred to (No determination in step S4604 of FIG. 57). If the input number limitation flag is on, no processing is performed on the requested number of coins, and 0 is returned to the game control unit 302 as a response command (No determination in step S4621 in FIG. 57). The game control unit 302 that receives this response command adds 0, which is the value returned by this response command, to the current number of bets (step S1123 in FIG. 55), so the current number of bets is maintained without changing. It turns out.

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 57, if there is no number of game medals greater than or equal to the requested number and the input number limitation flag is off, the same operation as when the current number of game medals is set to the requested number will occur (see FIG. 57). (Yes is determined in step S4621, and the number of game medals is set as the value of the received command in S4622). That is, the value of the current number of game medals is added to the number of inserted medals and the current number of bets, and the number of game medals is subtracted to become zero. Then, the value of the number of game medals before subtraction (the value set in the received command) is returned to the game control unit 302 by the response command. The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current number of bets (step S1123 in FIG. 55).

In the above modified example, if the number of game medals corresponding to the number requested in the input command is not sufficient, if the input number limit flag is on, 0 is returned for the requested number of tokens, and if the input number limit flag is off, then 0 is returned for the requested number of medals. returns the maximum number of sheets currently available for the requested number. With this configuration, when the number of medals control section 350 cannot respond to the number of medals requested from the game control section 302, the operation of not responding and the operation of responding as much as possible are used. A limited flag) is sent together with the requested number of sheets. With this configuration, for example, in a configuration where the advantage changes depending on the difference in the current bet number, it may be possible to prevent the current bet number from unintentionally becoming a disadvantageous value.

Note that in this embodiment, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated, the value required to set the maximum bet amount is set as the requested number of coins. A configuration may also be adopted in which some fixed value is set as the requested number of sheets, as shown in FIG.

For example, in a case where a configuration is adopted in which the maximum bet number is set as the required number of coins, if the 1 bet button 130 is operated first and the current bet number is 1, the MAX bet button 132 is pressed. When an input command is transmitted with the maximum bet number as the requested number, the medal number control unit 350 does not accept this requested number (exceeds the maximum bet number). In this case as well, there will be a case where the number of medals control section 350 cannot respond to the number of medals requested from the game control section 302. In such cases, by sending the information for proper usage and the requested number of sheets together, you can choose between an action that does not correspond to the requested number of sheets (for example, returning 0 as a response command) and an action that corresponds to the requested number of sheets as much as possible (for example, returning 0 as a response command). For example, it is possible to use a command that returns the maximum bet amount as a response command.

《Operation example》
An example of the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be described below.

[Example of operation related to counting process]
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a first example in which the count button 171 is operated. FIG. 62(a) is a timing chart of the first example, and FIG. 62(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit, 7-segment display.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 62(a), time passes from left to right. Note that the same applies to the timing charts shown in subsequent figures.

At the top of the timing chart shown in FIG. 62(a), arrows are marked with symbols corresponding to (i) to (v) shown in FIG. 62(b). These arrows represent the display period of the game medal number display device 170.

Furthermore, at the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 62(a), the timing at which the count notification is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 is written as "counting timing." This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). The number of coins counted (the number of gaming values transmitted to the rental machine 700) at this counting timing is shown. Furthermore, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown below the "counted number". Furthermore, below that, the operation mode of the count button 171 is shown.

In the first example shown in FIG. 62, the operation of the counting button 171 is started when the "number of game medals" is 250. As shown in (i) of FIG. 62(b), the number “250” is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Even when the first counting timing arrives after starting the operation of the counting button 171, the counting button 171 remains operated. Eventually, 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the start of the operation of the counting button 171. Even after 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the counting button 171 continues to be operated, becomes a long-press operation, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to 50 sheets (step S4209 of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process shown in FIG. 40). ). In the following description, operating the counting button 171 for 0.5 seconds or more will be referred to as a long press, and operating the counting button 171 for less than 0.5 seconds after starting the operation will be referred to as a short press. The scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process shown in FIG. It continues to be overwritten with the value of 50 sheets. After 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of operation of the counting button 171, when the first counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 continues to be operated, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted. (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. The "number of game medals" decreases by 50 and becomes 200. As shown in (ii) of FIG. 62(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which the number "250" is subtracted by "1". This change display is performed by displaying numbers subtracted by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals by the display display process shown in FIG. If the display on the game medal number display device 170 suddenly changes from "250" to "200", the player may not notice the change in the display. Display (a display that is performed before displaying the number of game medals after the reduction of 50 medals, and a display that makes it clear that the number of game medals is changing) is performed. Then, when about 200 ms have elapsed, the number "200" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (iii) of FIG. 62(b).

When the next counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is held down, the number of medals to be counted is set again based on the value of the scheduled number of medals to be counted (50 in this example), and 50 medals are sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. The count notification will be sent again. The "number of game medals" decreases by 50 and becomes 150. As shown in (iv) of FIG. 62(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which the number "200" is subtracted by "1" at intervals of approximately 4 ms. Then, after approximately 200 ms has elapsed, the number "150" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, as shown in (v) of FIG. 62(b).

Furthermore, when the third counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is held down, a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700, and the "number of game medals" is the 50 medals. It will decrease to 100 pieces. It is assumed that the counting button 171 is subsequently released before the fourth counting timing arrives. That is, the long-press operation of count button 171 ends. In this case, since the value of the number of sheets to be counted (here, 50 sheets) is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. The value of "number of sheets" is 0. Therefore, the "number of game medals" also remains at 100. Furthermore, since the change display is performed in a shorter time (approximately 200 ms) than the counting timing of 300 ms, after the player visually confirms the number after 50 medals have been reduced, if he/she wishes to keep that number of game medals, , by ending the operation of the counting button 171, that number of game medals can remain.

Also, if you release your hand from the counting button 171 before the first counting timing arrives after you start operating the counting button 171 (if you release your hand at the timing of arrow A shown in FIG. 62(a)), , one sheet is added to the value of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (step S4212 shown in FIG. 40), and when the counting timing arrives, that one sheet is transmitted as a count notification. The "number of game medals" decreases by one to 249, and the number "249" is displayed on the number of game medals display device 170.

In addition, if the counting button 171 is operated multiple times after the first operation of the counting button 171 is started and before the first counting timing arrives, that is, if the counting button 171 is pressed multiple times before the counting timing arrives. In this case, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is incremented by 1 each time a short press is performed. Eventually, when the counting timing arrives, the number of sheets to be counted is set based on the value of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted (corresponding to the number of single presses in this case), and the value of the number of short presses so far is transmitted as a count notification.

On the other hand, if you release your hand from the counting button 171 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since you started operating the counting button 171 and before the first counting timing arrives (as indicated by the arrow B shown in FIG. 62(a)) (If you release your hand at the timing), even if 50 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted, it will be cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. 40, so a counting notification of 50 sheets will not be sent. The value of "count" becomes 0 (a count notification with a count of 0 is sent). Similarly, if the display on the game medal number display device 170 changes from 250 to 200 over about 200 ms, and then the counting button 171 is released before the next counting timing arrives (FIG. 62(a) Even if you release your hand at the timing of arrow C shown in ), a counting notification of 50 sheets will not be sent, and the "count" value will be 0 sheets (a counting notification with a counted number of 0 sheets will be sent). ).

FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing a first example of the effect when counting is being performed.

FIG. 63 shows the effect image display device 157 and the speaker 272. As described above, the security command sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 at a cycle of 100 ms includes information representing the number of coins to be counted.

When the counting button 171 is pressed briefly and one coin is counted, the effect image display device 157 does not display a display notifying that counting is being performed. For example, if the game background display is displayed, , the display continues. Further, the counting sound is not output from the speaker 272. For example, if the effect sound corresponding to the game background display is being output, that output is continued. If a small number of counting sounds are output, they may mix in with other performance sounds and give the player a different sense of expectation than the expectation that the other performance sounds were intended to express. In the first example, no counting sound is output. If there is a large number of counting sounds, the output time will be longer, so there is less risk that the sound will mix with other performance sounds, and the effect on other performance sounds will be small. Note that even when two sheets are counted as a small number, the counting sound may not be outputted, as in the case of one sheet.

On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is held down and 50 sheets are counted, a display notifying that counting is being performed is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a counting sound is output from the speaker 272. . That is, as described above, the security command sent from the gaming control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 at a cycle of 100 ms includes information representing the number of coins to be counted. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a counting sound when information representing 50 sheets is transmitted as information representing the number of sheets to be counted. Further, when the second sub-control unit 500 also receives information representing 50 sheets as the information representing the number of sheets to be counted, it displays a counting notification.

Furthermore, as the long press continues and 50 sheets are being counted every 0.3 seconds, as shown in FIG. be done. This character display is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. Further, the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound (for example, a notification sound of "piyo piyo...") having a length of 0.3 seconds or more. Since the length of the counting sound that is output at one time is 0.3 seconds or more, it is connected to the counting sound that is output at the timing of counting the next 50 sheets, and it sounds as if it is being output continuously. For example, if the counting sound is longer than 0.5 seconds, it will overlap with the counting sound that is output at the next 50 sheet counting timing, and continuity will be maintained, and the counting sound will not be output during consecutive counting periods. Continue without interruption. Continuous counting is recognized by the text display "Continuous counting" and continuous counting sounds.

Note that when the number of sheets counted exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10 sheets) of 2 or more and less than 50 sheets, a counting sound may be output. In this case, a counting sound different from the counting sound during long press may be output. By doing this, for example, if a short press is repeated, it is possible to recognize that a plurality of sheets have been counted. Alternatively, if the "number of game medals" stored in the medal number control unit 350 is pressed for a long time when less than 50 medals remain (for example, 10 medals remaining), 10 medals are counted instead of 50. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that there is only a little time remaining from the change in the performance sound.

FIG. 64 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation is performed before operating the counting button 171 and the number of bets is not 0. In this embodiment, even if the counting button 171 is operated, the value of the current number of bets does not change, but in this FIG. 64, if the current number of bets is not 0 when the counting button 171 is operated, counting processing is executed This is a modification example in which a settlement process (setting the current number of bets to 0 and adding the decrease to the number of game medals) is performed beforehand.

In the example shown in FIG. 64, if the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated and the count button 171 is operated before the start lever 135 is operated, the settlement (the number of bets is returned to the "number of game medals") is performed. be exposed.

In FIG. 64, the "current number of bets" is shown, and below that the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Furthermore, below that, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is shown, and at the bottom, the operation mode of the counting button 171 is shown.

In this example, the MAX bet button 132 is operated and the "current bet number" is three. In response to this bet operation, three medals are subtracted from the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, and the number is reduced from 68 to 65. Eventually, the count button 171 is operated instead of the start lever 135. When the counting button 171 is operated, an up edge of a signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 is detected, and based on this up edge detection, the number of betted coins is first returned to the "number of game medals". . As a result, the "current number of bets" becomes 0, and the "number of game medals" increases by three to 68. In other words, the state returns to the state before the bet operation, and the previous bet operation is cancelled. After this cancellation, counting processing is performed. The counting button 171 is pressed for a long time, and when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is kept pressed for a long time, 50 coins are counted, and the "number of game medals" decreases by 50 and becomes 18 coins.

In this example, although the current number of bets can be returned to the "number of game medals" by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1, the number of game medals changes due to further counting processing. You end up doing it. In this configuration, if only the current number of bets is desired to be changed, the settlement button 134 may be operated. For example, if you want to change to a 1-coin bet after placing a 3-coin bet, operate the settlement button 134 to return the 3 bets to the "number of game medals" and then make a 1-copy bet again. By operating the button 130, the current number of bets can be reduced to one. Incidentally, since the settlement process can be performed by operating the count button 171 without operating the settlement button 134, the settlement button 134 may not be provided.

FIG. 65 is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end effect.

As described above, information representing the number of coins to be counted is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 from the game control unit 302 in a security command. The first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the counted number of sheets that are included in the security command and is sent until the number of sheets that is sent becomes 0, at which point it becomes 0 (when counting ends). Execute the counting end effect with . The counting end performance here is a performance according to the number of counts to be performed at one time.

FIG. 65(a) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative counted number of sheets is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets). During counting, the effect image display device 157 displays a counting effect (for example, displays the text "Continuous counting" and outputs a counting sound, as explained using FIG. 63), and when counting is completed, a counting effect is performed. , a counting end effect 1 is performed in which characters "Counting End" are displayed on the effect image display device 157.

On the other hand, FIG. 65(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a counting end performance performed when the cumulative counted number of sheets is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets) or more. When the counting of more than a predetermined number of coins is completed, counting end effect 2 is performed, and in addition to the character display of ``Counting completed'', a warning display of ``Be careful not to save too much'' is added to the effect image display device 157.

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 "game medals". However, in the slot machine 100, there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" may disappear. Therefore, it is desirable that the slot machine 100 not continue to store too many "number of game medals." Therefore, it is preferable to provide notification to increase the frequency of operation of the counting button 171. The alert display described using FIG. 65(b) is an example of a notification that increases the frequency of operation of the counting button 171, and urges the lending machine 700 to appropriately transfer gaming value. Note that the counting effect may also be changed according to the cumulative number of sheets counted. For example, if the cumulative count is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets), counting effect A is performed, and after the cumulative count exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 1000 sheets), counting effect B is performed. shall be carried out. Further, counting performance A is a performance that gives an impression of being in an appropriate state, and counting performance B is a performance that gives an impression of being in an inappropriate state. A large cumulative number of coins may give an unfavorable impression to the player.

Here, the operation of the slot machine 100 when the settlement button 134 is operated will be explained.

FIG. 66 is a timing chart showing an example when the payment button 134 is operated.

In a conventional slot machine, real medals are lent, the real medals are inserted to secure credits, and the credits are used to set the number of bets. In such conventional slot machines, the subject of actual medal settlement processing includes not only the betted medals but also the stored medals (for example, the maximum number of medals that can be bet is 3 and the maximum number that can be stored is 50). A total of 53 tickets will be processed for settlement.) When this payment process is completed, a demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 may execute a process of displaying a demo screen on the effect image display device 157. That is, there is a certain amount of time while the payment processing, which may involve the physical discharge of medals, is being performed. A settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect related to settlement based on this settlement button command, and when the settlement is completed, a demonstration is performed. Shift to demonstration performance based on commands.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, which does not require actual medals, the object of settlement is the betted medals (currently the number of bets, maximum 3), and since physical medals are not ejected, The processing time involved in payment is very short. Therefore, after the payment button 134 is pressed, there is only a short processing time related to payment, and the demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400 without delay. Therefore, if the specification is such that the performance is executed based on the execution of the payment process, this performance will only be performed for a short period of time before the demonstration performance, and there is a risk that the performance will feel strange to the player. There is.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 66, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 performs a production based on this settlement button command. (output of checkout sound, etc.) is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 66, when the bet operation is performed and the "current bet number" is 3, the settlement button 134 is operated and the settlement operation is performed. As a result of this settlement operation, the number of betted medals (3 medals) is added to the "number of game medals" and becomes 68 medals from 65 medals.

FIG. 66 shows the speaker 272 and the effect image display device 157. Even if the payment operation is performed, the payment sound is not output from the speaker 272. Further, the game background display continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the payment display is not displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 66 immediately switches to demonstration display. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the demonstration effect based on receiving the checkout button command (or the demo command immediately after the checkout button command). In this example, only the demonstration effect is executed at the start of the demonstration, making the start of the demonstration more clear.

In addition, the specification may be such that the payment performance is executed (for example, it is executed for 2 seconds). While this payment performance is being executed, the payment performance is continued even if the demonstration performance has been started, so that both performances are executed. Although it is expected that the frequency of checkout operations will be lower than with conventional slot machines, there is a non-zero possibility that checkout operations will be carried out due to fraud (so-called cheating), so it is possible that there are checkout operations in the surrounding area. Let everyone know what happened.

Next, an example in which the number of sheets to be counted changes depending on the length of time for which the counting button 171 is operated will be described.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted increases as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer. In this example, instead of the scheduled counting number updating process shown in FIG. 40, the scheduled counting number updating process shown in FIG. 58 is adopted.

FIG. 67A is a table showing specific values of the count long press timer set in step S4221 in the flowchart of the scheduled count number update process shown in FIG. In this table, the value of the count long press timer is set for each long press step value. That is, until the value of the long press step value increases from 1 to 4, as the long press step value increases, the value of the counting long press timer decreases by a predetermined period of time (here, 300 ms). That is, the value of the counting long press timer is gradually becoming shorter. When the value of the long press step value is 4 or more, the value of the counting long press timer becomes a constant value (here, 300 ms).

FIG. 67(b) is a table showing specific values of the number of sheets to be counted used in step S4222 in the flowchart of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted update process shown in FIG. In this table, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set for each long press stage value. That is, until the value of the long press stage value increases from 1 to 4, as the long press stage value increases, the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases. As a result, the number of sheets to be counted increases in stages according to the operation time of the counting button 171. Note that even if the same value is set multiple times, the number of sheets to be counted will increase in stages. For example, even if the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set as 10→10→20→20→20→30→30→30→30, etc., the result is a stepwise increase. When the long press step value is 4 or more, the number of sheets to be counted is a constant value (here, 50 sheets).

FIG. 67(c) is a timing chart when counting is performed using the count long press timer shown in FIG. 67(a) and the scheduled number of sheets to be counted shown in FIG. 67(b).

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 67(c), the timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 is written as "counting timing." This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). On the other hand, at the top of the timing chart, a timing chart is shown in which the state in which the counting button 171 is operated is represented as an ON state.

From the time the counting button 171 changes from the OFF state to the ON state, a counting long press timer (value for 1.2 seconds) with a long press step value of 1 is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), and the timer is When the count button 171 is kept pressed until the value becomes "1", 10 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Then, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 0.9 seconds) with a long press step value of 2 is set (steps shown in FIG. 58). S4221). If the counting button 171 is kept pressed until the 0.9 seconds set in the count long press timer elapses, the 10 sheets set as the number of sheets to be counted will be counted at 0.9 seconds. It will be counted every time it arrives every 3 seconds.

Eventually, when the value of the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Subsequently, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 0.6 seconds) with a long press step value of 3 is set (as shown in FIG. 58). Step S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until the 0.6 seconds set in the count long press timer elapses, the count timing of 20 sheets will be 0. It will be counted every time it arrives every 3 seconds.

If the value of the count long press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Further, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 0.3 seconds) with a long press step value of 4 is set (steps shown in FIG. 58). S4221). If the count button 171 is kept pressed until the 0.3 seconds set in the count long press timer has elapsed, the counting timing will arrive at 30 sheets, which was set as the number of sheets to be counted. This will be counted.

Then, when the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Thereafter, a value of 0.3 seconds is repeatedly set on the count long press timer (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), and 50 sheets is repeatedly set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). As a result, if the counting button 171 is maintained in the operated state, 50 sheets will be counted every time the counting timing arrives.

Note that in the example described here, as the operation time of the count button 171 becomes longer, the value of the count long press timer becomes shorter and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases, but the operation time of the count button 171 As the timer becomes longer, the value of the count long press timer becomes longer and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may increase, or the value of the long press timer becomes longer and the value of the number of sheets to be counted decreases. Alternatively, the value of the counting long press timer may become shorter, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may decrease.

In addition, the value set in the counting long press timer is gradually shortened and the value of the number of medals to be counted is gradually increased until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0. You can.

FIG. 68(a) is a timing chart showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 67(c).

In the example shown in FIG. 67(c), after the long press step value reaches 4, the value of the count long press timer will be constant at the shortest time of 0.3 seconds, and the number of sheets to be counted will be constant at the maximum of 50 sheets. become. This state may continue until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0, but if the number of game medals falls below a certain value (for example, 300 pieces), the final stage process is executed. You may also do so. The final stage process here is a process in which, as the number of game medals decreases, the value of the count long press timer is lengthened and the value of the number of medals to be counted is decreased.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 68(a) displays the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. At the left end of this timing chart, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.3 seconds, and the "number of game medals" is set to 299 with the scheduled number of medals to be counted set to 50. The "number of game medals" is less than a certain value (300 medals).

When the value of the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets is again set as the number of sheets to be counted (step SS4222 shown in FIG. 58). Note that the number of sheets set at this timing may be less than 50 sheets (for example, 30 sheets). Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.6 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58) and becomes longer.

Eventually, when the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.9 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), and becomes longer again.

If the value of the count long press timer becomes "1" again while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is set to a value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), and becomes even longer.

Then, when the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets is again set as the number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Note that a number less than 20 sheets (for example, 10 sheets) may be set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted. Furthermore, when the value of the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the count long press timer is again set to the value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58). Note that a value exceeding a value of 1.2 seconds (for example, a value of 1.5 seconds) may be set as the value of the count long press timer. In the example shown in FIG. 68(a), after the "number of game medals" reaches 9, the player releases the counting button 171 and the counting button 171 becomes OFF. As a result, the counting ends when the "number of game medals" reaches nine.

In the final stage process described above, the number of sheets to be counted decreases step by step, and furthermore, the value of the count long press timer becomes longer. The "number of game medals" becoming 0 is reduced. Note that if you want to set the "number of game medals" to 0, you can continue to operate the counting button 171 until the display on the number of game medals display device 170 becomes "0".

FIG. 68(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where, in the example shown in FIG. 67(c), a power outage occurs when 30 sheets are set as the scheduled number of sheets to be counted, and then the power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 68(b), the counting button 171 remains operated after the power outage occurs and until the power is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power outage, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, some players do not take their hands off the count button 171 even if they know that the power has been cut off. However, this was done in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 was left being operated after the power was cut off until the power was restored; in reality, the counting button 171 was not operated until the power was restored. I don't know if it was still there. If the power is restored while the counting button 171 is still being operated, an on signal is detected without detecting an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. In this case, if the ON signal is detected even after 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for the long press operation, the medal number control unit 350 selects the maximum number of medals (in this example, 50 medals) as the number of medals to be counted. ) (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Even if the control is temporarily interrupted due to a power outage, the fact that the count button 171 has been operated for a long period of time can be reflected after the power is restored.

Note that after the power is restored, the number of sheets may be set slightly smaller than the maximum number (for example, 30 sheets). Alternatively, the number of sheets to be counted at the time of power outage may be reset.

Further, although the explanation here has been about the number of sheets to be counted, the same applies to the value of the count long press timer. That is, if the power is restored while the counting button 171 is still being operated, the medal number control unit 350 sets the value for the shortest time (in this example, the value for 300 ms) as the value of the counting long press timer. (Step S4221 shown in FIG. 58).

FIG. 69 is a timing chart showing an example in which the scheduled count number update process of FIG. 59 is adopted.

Operation of the counting button 171 starts at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds elapses while it is in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long press operation and 50 sheets are counted. Furthermore, when 1.5 seconds (cumulatively 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C) elapses while the ON state remains ON, automatic counting will be performed even if you release your hand from the counting button 171, and the count will be counted for 0.3 seconds. Each time the timing comes, 50 pieces are counted. This automatic counting continues until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reduce the number of game medals to 0 with a hassle-free operation.

Note that when automatic counting is started, the change display on the game medal number display device 170 described using FIG. go. On the 7-segment display that is the game medal number display device 170, the change display that subtracts 1 at approximately 4ms intervals is caused by afterimages, so that all 7 segments are lit and some segments are slightly blinking. It may look like this. Furthermore, if the change display continues until the number of game medals in the "number of game medals" reaches 0, the currently displayed number may become difficult to understand. In addition, players who choose automatic counting often want to set the number of game medals in the "Number of game medals" to 0, and there may be cases where there is little need to display changes and show how they are being subtracted by 1. be.

Further, since there is no operation by the player during the period when automatic counting is being performed, it is preferable to use a lamp or the like to notify that automatic counting is being performed. Furthermore, if there is a payout based on the game result during automatic counting, that payout is also included in the automatic counting. That is, the number of medals paid out during automatic counting is added to the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, and will be included in the target from the next counting.

FIG. 70(a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value.

Automatic counting starts when 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the operation of the counting button 171, and 50 sheets are counted every time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives. In FIG. 70(a), the value of "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is also written under "number of medals counted". In this example, the user releases the counting button 171 when the "number of game medals" reaches 147, but the "number of game medals" continues to decrease due to automatic counting. Eventually, when the "number of game medals" becomes less than a certain value (for example, the value counted at one counting timing, here 50 medals), the automatic counting will automatically end and you will have to operate the counting button 171. In this case, the "number of game medals" will no longer decrease. Here, the remaining 47 sheets remain without being automatically counted. If you want to continue playing after automatic counting, you can start playing quickly because there are still numbers left. There are cases where it is desired to count all the game medals. To start counting again, the counting button 171 is operated again. For example, if you press and hold for 0.5 seconds, the "number of game medals" becomes 0. Note that although the certain value is set to 50 coins, a certain value may be set by the player. For example, the player may be able to select from 0, 20, and 50 coins. After counting, you can leave your desired number of game medals. Note that a certain value may be set depending on the gaming state. For example, in a normal game state, a certain value is set to 0 coins, and in a bonus game state, such as during an AT game, a certain value is set to 50 coins. Since there is a low possibility of ending the game in the bonus game state, the game can be started quickly by leaving a certain number of game medals. Note that a certain value may be set depending on the automatically counted number of game medals. For example, if less than 100 game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 0, and if 100 or more game medals are counted, a certain value is set to 20. If a small number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to exchange the counted number of game medals for prizes such as drinks, and the game may be continued after automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, the game can be started immediately. Moreover, the reverse is also possible. If a large number of game medals are counted, there is a possibility that the purpose was to temporarily count them by issuing a notification to prompt counting, and there is a possibility that the game may be continued after automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, the game can be started immediately.

FIG. 70(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power outage occurs during automatic counting and the power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 70(b), automatic counting is started and the counting button 171 is released. A power outage occurs while 50 medals are being counted every time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives due to automatic counting. After that, the power is restored, but if the counting button 171 is operated again at the timing of this power restoration, or if the counting button 171 is started during a power outage and the power is restored while it is being operated, After the power is restored, an on signal indicating the on state of the counting button 171 is detected. If this ON signal is detected at the time of power restoration, automatic counting is started even if 2 seconds, which is the determination time for starting automatic counting, has not elapsed. That is, when the first counting timing arrives after power is restored, 50 sheets are counted. Therefore, even if the user takes his hand off the counting button 171 before 2 seconds have passed after the power is restored, automatic counting is started.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example display indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

FIG. 71 shows an effect image display device 157, which is a liquid crystal display, and a game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit, 7-segment display.

The upper part of FIG. 71 shows the state during counting before automatic counting is started. In other words, the number of sheets to be counted is determined by the manner in which the counting button 171 is operated (long press or one or more short presses). In this state, characters "Counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is displayed. That is, the character display "Counting" is displayed so as to overlap the game background display.

Further, in the game medal number display device 170 shown on the upper side, a segment representing 97 is lit.

On the other hand, the lower side of FIG. 71 shows a state where automatic counting is being performed. When the medal number control unit 350 starts automatic counting, it sends a command to the game control unit 302 including automatic counting information indicating that the counting is performed by automatic counting, in the counted number information of the medal number control state command. The game control section 302 sends the security command to the first sub-control section 400, including the above-mentioned automatic counting information in addition to the information representing the number of coins to be counted. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the automatic counting information via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the text "Counting automatically" and a message 157m. Automatic counting status notification is performed while automatic counting is being performed. Note that while automatic counting is being performed, notification may be provided by sound or lamp. In FIG. 71, the words "Automatically counting" are displayed on the effect image display device 157 where the game background is displayed. Further, below that, there is an explanation about how to handle the counting button 171 during automatic counting, such as ``Counting will continue even if you release your hand from the button.'' In a state where automatic counting status notification is being performed, button operation unnecessary notification is performed. Furthermore, an explanation such as ``you can play games'' is also given. In a state where automatic counting state notification is being performed, notification that game progress is possible is performed. It is reported that it is possible to proceed with the game, such as operating the start lever 135 and operating the stop buttons 130 to 132, even during automatic counting. Note that during the counting process, operations on the bet buttons 130 and 132 are not accepted. In addition, since it is expected that there will be cases where you want to manually end automatic counting after automatic counting has started, if you operate the counting button 171 again after automatic counting has started, automatic counting will end. Good too. That is, when the medal number control unit 350 detects an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 during automatic counting, it ends the automatic counting. When automatic counting ends, automatic counting status notification ends.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

Operation of the counting button 171 starts at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds elapses while it is in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long press operation and 50 sheets are counted. Furthermore, when 1.5 seconds (cumulatively 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C) elapses while the count button 171 is in the ON state, automatic counting is performed even if the count button 171 is released. In this example, after 2.0 seconds have elapsed and the first counting timing has arrived, a counting sound indicating that automatic counting has started is output from the speaker 272. Note that the counting sound may be output from the time point when 2.0 seconds have elapsed.

The volume of the counting sound increases at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time here is 1.2 seconds, but may be 3 seconds or 0.3 seconds. By increasing the volume as time passes, it is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count is increasing. The first counting sound that is output first and the second counting sound that is output next are output continuously, the second counting sound and the third counting sound that is output next are also output continuously, and the third counting sound is output continuously. The sound and the fourth counting sound that is output next are also output continuously. Note that in addition to the volume, rhythm, pitch, tone color, etc. may also be changed. That is, the counting sound only needs to change in stages. For example, the (n+1)th counting sound may be a counting sound with a faster rhythm than the nth counting sound, or may be a counting sound with a higher pitch. Note that the volume may not increase at predetermined time intervals, and only the tone may change at predetermined time intervals. For example, the first counting sound is a sound consisting only of instrument sound A, the second counting sound is a sound consisting of a plurality of sounds including instrument sound A and instrument sound B, and the third counting sound is a sound consisting of instrument sound A and instrument sound B. The sound is made up of a plurality of sounds, including instrument sound B and instrument sound C. It is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count is increasing.

On the other hand, if the counting sound continues to be output during counting, the player may feel uncomfortable. For example, counting 5,000 coins earned through a game at once takes approximately 50 seconds. If the counting sound is continuously output during this period, it may be unpleasant to the user's ears, and may also be disliked by the player next to him. As a countermeasure for these cases, the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time passes, or the counting sound may be output for a predetermined period of time and thereafter be silent (volume 0). Note that the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time passes, and after the counting sound has been output for a predetermined period of time, the sound may be set to a constant sound (volume 1).

Furthermore, in the case of slot machines that have a function that allows players to perform various customizations, the type of counting sound, the volume, and the way it changes (for example, whether the volume increases or decreases), etc. The player may be able to make a selection. This can also make counting more interesting.

Furthermore, in addition to sound, a lamp may be made to emit light or an image may be output, and the light emission mode of the lamp or the image may be changed in stages.

FIG. 73 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the start of the operation of the count button 171.

In the example shown in FIG. 73(a), a power outage occurs before the count button 171 is started to be operated and the count long press flag described using FIG. 40 (or FIGS. 58 and 59) is set to on. The counting button 171 remains operated until the power is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power outage, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, some players do not take their hands off the count button 171 even if they know that the power has been cut off. However, this was done in consideration of the case where the counting button 171 was left being operated after the power was cut off until the power was restored; in reality, the counting button 171 was not operated until the power was restored. I don't know if it was still there. If the power is restored while the counting button 171 is still being operated, an on signal is detected without detecting an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. If the on signal is detected without an up edge being detected after the power is restored, the medal number control unit 350 determines that the counting button 171 has continued to be operated, and the medal number control unit 350 determines that the counting button 171 has been continuously operated, and restarts the process for 0.5 seconds from the time of power restoration. It is determined whether the counting button 171 remains operated until the elapsed time. Here, if the counting button 171 continues to be operated, the count long press flag is set to on, and if the counting button 171 continues to be operated, 50 sheets are counted at the counting timing. It is counted.

If a long press is performed after the power is restored, a long press notification may be performed. If the long press is continued at the time when the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored, the long press notification starts from this point. This means that if you release your hand from the counting button 171 before 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the button will not be pressed for a long time, and the count will start after 0.5 seconds have elapsed and before the first counting timing arrives. If the button 171 is released, no sheets will be counted, so if the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed, the button 171 must be kept pressed for a long time. Pressing notification starts.

Note that if the counting button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored, one sheet will be counted, but this may be due to an erroneous operation. For this reason, if the operation of the counting button 171 is completed within 0.5 seconds immediately after the power is turned on, it may be determined that the counting button 171 has been erroneously operated and no sheets are counted.

Note that FIG. 73(b) shows an example in which the start of operation of the counting button 171 is determined by detecting only the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171.

According to the example shown in FIG. 73(b), since the counting button 171 has been operated during the power outage, the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 is not detected after the power is restored. No matter how long the counting button 171 is continued to be operated, a long-press determination is not made and counting is not performed. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 73(a), the long press is determined based on whether 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the ON signal of the count button 171 was detected, so even if an up edge is not detected, Long press determination is executed.

FIG. 74 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 73.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 74(a), the power is cut off when X seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation of the count button 171, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation. , and then power is restored.

After the power is restored, if an on signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the count button 171, press and hold for the X seconds that had elapsed before the power was cut off. If the operation of the count button 171 continues for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds), the count button 171 will be operated for 0.5 seconds. The count long press flag is set to on, assuming that the count is still in the state of being pressed.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 74(b), the power is cut off when X seconds have elapsed from the start of operation of the count button 171, which is shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, and then Power will be restored.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 74(b), a standby process for a certain period (in this example, a standby time of 2 seconds) is provided when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). That is, since the processing load increases immediately after the power is turned on, processing related to the counting button 171 is performed after waiting until an appropriate timing for performing counting processing. When the standby time has elapsed, the process related to the counting button 171 is performed as in FIG. 74(a). In other words, if an on signal is detected without detecting an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the count button 171, the X seconds that had elapsed before the power cut is determined as a long press operation. If the operation of the counting button 171 continues for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds) after the waiting time has elapsed, the counting button 171 remains in the operated state, the count long press flag is set to on.

FIG. 75 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 73.

In the third modification shown in FIG. 75(a), after the start of the operation of the counting button 171, a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, has elapsed, and then the power is restored. .

After the power is restored (power is turned on), if an on signal is detected without an up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 being detected, the medal number control unit 350 determines whether the counting button 171 is operated. It determines that this has continued and starts a timer dedicated to when the power is turned on. This timer measures a longer time (for example, 2 seconds) than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Specifically, 2000 ms is set as an initial value exclusively for power-on to the count long press timer, which is set to 500 ms as an initial value in step S4206 in FIG. By doing this, when the long press operation is performed immediately after the power is turned on, the count long press flag is set to ON, and when the count timing comes while the count button 171 is being operated continuously, 50 The pieces are counted.

In the fourth modification shown in FIG. 75(b), a power outage occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the start of the operation of the counting button 171, and then the power is restored. . In this example, the operator takes his hand off the count button 171 during the power outage, and the operation ends. Therefore, when the power is restored (power is turned on), an on signal indicating the on state of the counting button 171 is not detected. In this fourth modification, a timer dedicated to power-on is activated in conjunction with power-on. This timer measures a longer time (for example, 3 seconds) than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Further, the timer setting value exclusively for power-on in this example is longer than the timer setting value exclusively for power-on (for example, 2 seconds) in the third modification. If the operation of the counting button 171 is started while the timer dedicated for power-on is counting time, and the operation of the counting button 171 continues even after 3 seconds have passed, the counting long press flag is set to on. Ru. That is, while this timer is counting time, at least one of the up edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the counting button 171 and the on signal is detected, and the on signal is not detected even after 3 seconds have passed. If so, the count long press flag is set to on. Then, when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 continues to be operated, 50 sheets are counted.

Next, the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display explained using FIG. 62(b), will be explained in detail again.

FIG. 76(a) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (subtraction) on the game medal number display device 170.

As shown at the top of FIG. 76(a), the number "100" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. When the change display starts, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number subtracted by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals in the display display process shown in FIG. 54. FIG. 76(a) shows how "1" is subtracted from "99" → "98" → "97" → "96" → "95" → "94".

When 50 sheets are counted by pressing and holding the counting button 171, the time required to display the change is approximately 4 ms x 50 = approximately 200 ms in order to display the change by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals. Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display for subtraction is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is possible to display the change for subtracting 50 sheets.

FIG. 76(b) is a diagram showing an example of a change display (addition) on the game medal number display device 170.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown at the top of FIG. 76(b). When the change display starts, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number incremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms, the same as the change display during subtraction. FIG. 76(b) shows how "1" is added by "1" as follows: "101" → "102" → "103" → "104" → "105" → "106".

If 50 coins are lent out by operating the lending button 707 and 15 coins (corresponding to the maximum number of coins allowed to be paid out under the rules) are paid out as a result of the game, "1" will be displayed at approximately 4ms intervals. In order to display changes (addition and subtraction) in increments, the time required for displaying changes is approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms. Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display to be added is shorter than the cycle of the count timing, and it is also possible to perform a change display in which 65 sheets are added.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing another example of change display on the game medal number display device 170. Since the player may not notice a change in the display content of the game medal number display device 170, this is an example of notifying the player that there has been a change in the display content.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 77(a). In this example, the change is displayed using all digits, making it easy to recognize that the change is in progress. When changing from the number "100" to the number "85", in the middle, all segments of all 5 digits are lit (display "88888"), and all segments of all 5 digits are turned off. In this example, the display (display of "00000") is switched every 8 ms. Eventually, in this example, after 250 ms have passed, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. Since the change display is performed using all the digits, it can be confirmed whether or not a failure has occurred in all the digit segments of the game medal number display device 170 that causes the display to stop. If it is recognized that no failure has occurred, it can be recognized that there is no error in the numbers displayed after the change is displayed.

Although all digits are used to display the change here, only some digits may be used to reduce processing load and data capacity. For example, one-digit display including the rightmost one digit, two-digit display, or three-digit display is performed. If all digits are not used and the rightmost single digit is not included, it may give the impression that the rightmost single digit segment has failed, so it is used to indicate that there is no failure. It is best to include the rightmost digit.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 77(b). In this example as well, the number changes from "100" to "85". That is, it changes from a 3-digit number to a 2-digit number. Therefore, changes are displayed using three-digit segments. The changing display here changes the position of the lit segment for each digit, making it appear as if the segments are rotating around. According to this change display, it is possible to give the impression that the value changes starting from "100". In this example, when 250 ms has passed since the start of the change display, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Note that if the change display is performed using two-digit segments instead of three-digit segments, it is possible to give the impression that the value changes with "85" as the end point.

A display that changes stepwise by a predetermined number (for example, 20) toward the target value may be performed while sandwiching the two types of change display described above using FIG. 77. Specifically, when changing from "100" to the final value of "60" (target value), "100" → change display → "80" → change display → display "60". Become. Further, when a full-color 7-segment LED display is used as the game medal number display device 170, the emitted light color of the segment may be changed when the segment is lit during the change display.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example in which the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 in addition to the game medal number display device 170.

The medal number control section 350 transmits a command including information representing the "number of game medals" (the displayed number of game medals shown in FIG. 11) to the game control section 302 as a medal number control state command. The game control unit 302 includes information representing the “number of game medals” in the security command, and transmits the security command to the first sub-control unit 400. The security command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100ms intervals. The second sub-control unit 500 receives information representing the “number of game medals” via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the “number of game medals”. In this example, the "number of game medals" is always displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the effect image display device 157.

In this example, the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 is displayed as is, according to the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command transmitted at 100 ms intervals. . The effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 78 displays the number "100" according to the previous security command. Further, the number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 displayed on the far left. In this state, the count button 171 is pressed and held to count 50 sheets. The medal number control unit 350 starts executing the display display process shown in FIG. 54, and the game medal number display device 170 starts displaying a change that subtracts "1" at intervals of about 4 ms. In addition, in FIG. 78, the display during the change display is shown in such a manner that all seven segments appear to be lit and some segments appear to be blinking slightly due to afterimages. In the game medal number display device 170, a change display that subtracts "1" is performed in about 200 ms, and the number "50" is displayed about 200 ms after 50 medals are counted.

On the other hand, on the first sub-control unit 400 side, when the count of 50 medals is performed, a security command containing information indicating that the "number of game medals" is 50 is sent during the transmission period (100 ms) of the security command. Receive commands. In the example shown in FIG. 78, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the security command after approximately 20 ms have passed since the counting of 50 sheets, and the display process is executed. The display process here is a frame replacement process in which an image displaying "100" is replaced with an image displaying "50", and is completed in a short time. As a result, the number "50" will be displayed on the performance image display device 157 before the change display on the game medal number display device 170 is completed.

In the example shown in FIG. 78 described above, the sub-control unit (400, 500) side that receives the information on the "number of game medals" does not display the change, and the main control unit 300 side that outputs the information, Displays changes. By doing this, the numerical value "50" finally displayed by the game medal number display device 170 can be understood from the display on the effect image display device 157, and "50" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. It can be recognized that the change display is complete at the point when the change display is completed.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 78.

In the modification shown in FIG. 79, the display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 also displays a change in which the number is subtracted by "1". Moreover, the change display takes more time than the change display on the game medal number display device 170. Specifically, the change display on the effect image display device 157 takes 280 ms. This time of 280 ms is the time period for the game medal number display device 170 when 50 medals are lent out by operating the lending button 707 and 15 medals (corresponding to the maximum number of medals to be paid out) are paid out as a result of the game. This time is longer than the time required to display the addition change (approximately 4 ms×65=approximately 260 ms) and less than 300 ms, which is the cycle of the counting timing.

The player usually looks at the performance image display device 157 in many cases, and rarely looks at the game medal number display device 170. As mentioned above, it is desired that the slot machine 100 not continue to store too many "number of game medals", and that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 should be increased. To do this, it is necessary for players to pay attention to the "number of game medals." The reason why the ``number of game medals'' is also displayed on the performance image display device 157 is to make the players pay as much attention to the ``number of game medals'' as possible. However, since the effect image display device 157 displays an attractive effect display such as a game background display, even if the "number of game medals" is displayed, the player is distracted by the attractive effect display. It becomes difficult. Therefore, as in this modification, if the display of the "number of game medals" on the performance image display device 157 is made to take longer than the display on the number of game medal display device 170, the player can It can be expected that the player will also pay attention to the speedy game medal number display device 170. If the player looks at the game medal number display device 170, no performance display is displayed on the game medal number display device 170, and the player can clearly recognize the "number of game medals." As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals is being accumulated, and it can be expected that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 will increase.

In addition, in the change display on the performance image display device 157, by displaying not only the changing character display but also an animation display indicating that the change is in progress, it is easier to draw attention to the "number of game medals", and the counting is also performed here. It can be expected that the button 171 will be operated more frequently. By making the change display by the effect image display device 157 different from the change display by the game medal number display device 170, it is possible to make the change display suitable for the period of change display. Note that the change display by the effect image display device 157 may be displayed in the same manner as the change display by the game medal number display device 170. You can easily recognize that a change display is being performed.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing another example completely different from the example shown in FIG. 78.

In another example shown in FIG. 80, the game medal number display device 170 does not display a change, but only the “number of game medals” on the effect image display device 157 displays a change. That is, in this other example, the display display process shown in FIG. 54 is not executed, and when 50 medals are counted, the number "50" is immediately displayed on the game medal number display device 170. On the other hand, even if the performance image display device 157 receives a security command, it does not immediately display the information representing the "number of game medals" included in the security command, but subtracts "1" at a time. The following changes are displayed.

In this other example as well, as in the modified example shown in FIG. It can be expected that they will also pay attention to the game medal number display device 170, which is quick to display. By looking at the game medal number display device 170, the player can clearly recognize the "number of game medals". As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals is being accumulated, and it can be expected that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 will increase. In addition, in the medal number control unit 350, the amount of data for displaying changes is reduced, and the processing load is also reduced.

FIG. 81(a) is a timing chart when a payout exceeds the payout threshold.

This FIG. 81(a) shows the value of "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. Further, below that, the number of payout coins to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

The RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 "game medals". That is, the maximum number of sheets that can be stored in the RAM 358 is 16,383. The payout threshold is set to this maximum stored number of coins.

In a state where the "number of game medals" is stored up to 16,373 medals, a further payout of 15 medals corresponding to the maximum number of payout medals (corresponding to the maximum number of payout medals allowed under the rules) occurs. The payout number of 15 coins is included in the game control state command 1 (payout command) and is transmitted from the game control section 302 to the medal number control section 350. When the number of payout medals of 15 is added, the "number of game medals" exceeds the maximum stored number of medals and exceeds the payout threshold in step S4B03 of FIG. 50. Therefore, the payout response command includes "abnormality" and is transmitted from the medal number control section 350 to the game control section 302. If the payout response command includes "abnormality", the game control unit 302 transmits a command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout). (Step S1608 shown in FIG. 22). Based on this command, the sub-control unit (400, 500) issues an upper limit exceedance error notification. In the example shown in FIG. 81(a), an upper limit exceeded error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed, indicating that the payout threshold has been exceeded and the count is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. A text display prompting the user to operate the button 171 is displayed. That is, the upper limit exceedance error notification is executed even during the game.

Note that an error sound may be output from the speaker 272 or a lamp may be lit as an upper limit exceedance error notification.

FIG. 81(b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit exceedance error notification.

A blinking display on the effect image display device 157 may be performed as an upper limit exceedance error notification. In the example shown in FIG. 81(b), the upper limit error notification text is displayed every second so as to overlap with the game background display. The upper limit exceedance error notification is displayed during the game so as to overlap the game background display, making the game background display difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage, a blinking display is performed to ensure a period during which the game background display is easily visible.

In addition, when the game control unit 302 receives the payout response command including “normal” from the medal number control unit 350, it transmits the payout command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 shown in FIG. 22). On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), when receiving the payout command while the upper limit exceedance error notification is being executed, the execution of the upper limit exceedance error notification is terminated. Note that if the count button 171 is operated, the upper limit exceedance error notification may be terminated regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit exceedance error notification can be ended early.

Further, information representing the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is included in the security command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the information representing the "number of game medals" that has been sent is the number of medals for the payout threshold (16383 medals), even if the sub-control unit (400, 500) side issues an error notification that the upper limit has been reached. good. For example, the effect image display device 157 may display a text message that reads, "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the counting button." This upper limit reaching error notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" becomes less than the payout threshold (16,383 medals). Note that if the counting button 171 is operated, the upper limit reaching error notification may be ended regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if the counting process takes time, the upper limit reaching error notification can be ended early.

Further, other cases in which the "number of game medals" is added include when there is payment and when there is lending from lending machine 700. Although this embodiment does not determine whether the upper limit has been reached for settlement, it may be determined whether the upper limit has been reached in the same way as in the case of payout. For example, even if the settlement threshold is set to the maximum number of stored medals and the settlement threshold is exceeded, the settlement response command will include "abnormality" and the medal number control unit 350 will send it to the game control unit 302. Allow it to be sent. Even if the payment response command includes "abnormality", the game control unit 302 sends an error occurrence command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that an error has occurred in which the number of displayed game medals exceeds the upper limit. , the sub-control unit (400, 500) side issues an upper limit exceedance error notification. On the other hand, the lending threshold is set to a smaller number than the maximum memory number (for example, 15,000), and if the "number of game medals" exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an error exceeding the upper limit lending will occur. , lending is not accepted (if the determination in step S3712 of FIG. 36 is No), and the "number of game medals" is not added. The notification of the lending error exceeding the upper limit is displayed on the information display 703 of the lending machine 700. However, by transmitting the fact that the upper limit lending error has occurred from the medal number control section 350 to the game control section 302 and further from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400, the production image display device 157 Notification can be made on the slot machine 100 side, such as the speaker 272 or the lamp.

FIG. 82(a) is a timing chart when the second payout threshold is exceeded and a payout is attempted.

In FIG. 82(a) as well, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown, and below that the number of payout medals to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

A command including the display number of game medals (number of game medals) is transmitted to the game control unit 302 from the medal number control unit 350 as a medal number control state command. A second payout threshold (for example, 15,000 pieces) is set in the game control unit 302, which is smaller than 16,383 pieces (payout threshold), which is the maximum number of pieces stored in the RAM 358. In the game control unit 302, if the number of game medals to be displayed that has been sent a command is equal to or higher than this second payout threshold, the first sub-control unit 400 is notified that an error indicating that the number of game medals to be displayed is close to the upper limit has occurred. Sends an error occurrence command indicating this. On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), based on this error occurrence command, an upper limit approaching notification is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 82(a), on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed, a character display prompting the operator to operate the counting button 171 is displayed as a notification that the upper limit is approaching so as to overlap the game background display. Displayed. That is, in this example as well, the upper limit approaching notification is executed during the game. FIG. 81(a) shows the effect image display device 157 that has switched from displaying this upper limit nearing notification to displaying upper limit exceeding error notification.

Note that as the upper limit approaching notification, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be lit. In addition, it was decided that the near-limit notification will continue from the start of the near-limit notification until the start of the upper limit exceeded error notification, but considering the game up to the upper limit of the number of game medals, the near-limit notification will continue during one game. The notification may be carried out only during a part of the time. For example, the notification may be performed within one second after the start lever 135 is operated. On the other hand, the upper limit exceedance error notification is a notification carried out during one game. For example, if it is known that there are only a few bonus periods left for AT games etc. even if the upper limit approaching notification is started, it is possible to easily give priority to the remaining AT games etc. Furthermore, when switching from upper limit nearing notification to upper limit exceeded error notification, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification has been changed.

FIG. 82(b) is a diagram showing another example of upper limit nearing notification.

Even when the upper limit is near, a blinking display may be performed on the effect image display device 157. In the example shown in FIG. 82(b), the character display of the upper limit nearing notification is displayed every second so as to overlap with the game background display. The near upper limit notification is also displayed during the game so as to overlap the game background display, making the game background display difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage, a blinking display is performed to ensure a period during which the game background display is easily visible.

In addition, when the game control unit 302 receives a command including the display number of game medals that is less than the second threshold for payout from the medal number control unit 350, the game control unit 302 causes the first sub-control unit 400 to notify the first sub-control unit 400 that the number of game medals to be displayed is about to error. Sends an error clearing command indicating that the error has been cleared. On the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), the execution of the near-upper limit notification is terminated based on this error cancellation command.

Further, a second threshold for payout may be set in the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, if the information indicating the "number of game medals" transmitted in the security command is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, the first sub-control unit 400 500) side may perform the above-mentioned upper limit approaching notification. This near-limit notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" becomes less than the second payout threshold.

Furthermore, a second threshold for payout may be set in the medal number control unit 350. In this case, the medal number control unit 350 determines whether the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, and if the number is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, A command for notification is transmitted to the control unit 302, and the game control unit 302 transmits a command for notification to the sub-control unit (400, 500) based on the command information. This also allows the sub-control unit (400, 500) to perform the upper limit impending notification. Then, when it becomes less than the second threshold for payout, a notification end command is transmitted through the route of medal number control section 350→game control section 302→sub control section (400, 500). Note that the blinking cycle of the blinking display of the upper limit approaching notification is preferably longer than the blinking cycle of the blinking display of the upper limit exceeded error notification. If the upper limit approach notification is switched to the upper limit exceeded error notification and the blinking cycle is shortened, the urgency of the notification can be easily recognized. Note that if the upper limit nearing notification is displayed in a blinking manner, the upper limit exceeded error notification may be displayed constantly. You will be able to easily recognize the high level of urgency of notification.

FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where a highly urgent error notification overlaps with a notification prompting counting.

The effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 83(a) displays a display indicating that the upper limit is near, overlapping the game background display. Note that the upper limit approaching notification display may be displayed constantly, but it is a blinking display that is displayed every second. The front door 102 is opened while the upper limit nearing notification is being performed. When the front door 102 is opened, the game control section 302 transmits an error occurrence command indicating that a door opening error has occurred to the first sub-control section 400. The sub-control unit (400, 500) side performs error notification based on this error occurrence command. When the front door 102 is open, there is an increased possibility of fraudulent acts (so-called cheating), so it is necessary to close the front door 102 as soon as possible. Therefore, the error notification of the door opening error is more urgent than the notification prompting counting. Note that even when the front door 102 is open, the operation of the counting button 171 is accepted. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 83(a) displays an error notification of a door opening error overlapping the game background display. The error notification display for the door open error (hereinafter referred to as the door open error display) is always displayed as the words "Door is open." This door open error display is displayed on the same layer as the near-limit notification display, but it may also be displayed on a layer before the near-limit notification display so that it overlaps with the near-limit notification display. . Alternatively, since the door open error display is always displayed, it is displayed on a layer deeper than the blinking upper limit notification, and the blinking upper limit nearing notification overlaps with the always displayed door open error display. You can do it like this.

FIG. 83(b) shows that in contrast to the door open error display which is always displayed, a character display indicating that the upper limit is near is displayed every second. The right side of FIG. 83(b) shows that the character display of the upper limit nearing notification disappears due to the blinking display, and the door open error display that remains constantly displayed is displayed. In the state shown on the right side, the highly urgent door open error display is easy to see. Further, the speaker 272 outputs a sound such as "The door is open" as an error notification of a door open error, but a notification sound of an upper limit approaching notification is not output.

Although the error is not as urgent as the door open error, there are errors such as ``Please stop the spinning reel'' and ``A communication error has occurred, which may be caused by a disconnected wire, a broken wire, or a power outage in the rental machine 700.'' ” may be displayed to request improvements, and in addition to these displays, notifications urging counting may also be provided.

FIG. 84(a) is a diagram showing an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after transitioning to the demonstration display.

In the slot machine 100, if there is no payout, all reels 110 to 112 stop, and if there is a payout, the bet is placed until a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the payout is completed. If no operation is performed, the state shifts to a demonstration state (demonstrating). Further, when the payment button 134 is operated, the process also shifts to the demonstration mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 84(a), during a game (during a bet, while the reels are rotating 110 to 112, or during a payout), the character display indicating that the upper limit is near is started, and the transition is made to the demo without the counting button 171 being operated. . The effect image display device 157 displays a game background display during the game, but switches to the demo display when the demo is in progress. The demo display is a display that introduces the story and characters. Even in the case of transitioning to the demonstration, the text display of the upper limit nearing notification continues to be displayed as long as the "number of game medals" does not become less than the second threshold for payout. If the transition is made during the demonstration, there is a high possibility that the players will leave their seats. By prompting the player to operate the count button 171 even during the demonstration, it may be possible to prevent the player from leaving the slot machine 100 by taking only the cards from the lending machine 700 and leaving the game medals in the slot machine 100. Note that the blinking display of the near upper limit notification may be continued to ensure visibility of the demonstration display, or the blinking display of the near upper limit notification may be constantly displayed to ensure visibility of the near upper limit notification.

FIG. 84(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification after the counting button 171 is operated during the demonstration.

A demonstration image is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 84(b). The notification prompting counting is displayed in the largest size so as to overlap the demo display. Here, since we want the user to operate the counting button 171 with priority, the notification prompting counting is displayed in the largest size. Further, below that, a warning message is displayed to prevent the card from being stolen while the user is away, such as ``Be careful not to forget or steal your card.'' Further, in this example, the "number of game medals" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the performance image display device 157, and "15300", which exceeds the second threshold for payout, is displayed. Note that "16383", which is the payout threshold value, may be displayed. The display of the "number of game medals" on the effect image display device 157 may be displayed all the time, may be displayed temporarily, or may not be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 84(a). good.

Eventually, the counting button 171 is operated, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a number less than the second threshold for payout. Then, the notification prompting counting disappears (is not displayed), and this time, the warning display is displayed in the largest size and stands out. Note that the "number of game medals" displayed at the lower right of the performance image display device 157 has decreased to "14,950".

FIG. 85(a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" once exceeds a certain specified number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold and then falls below the specified number.

In FIG. 85(a), the value of "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed as X medals. The X pieces correspond to a certain prescribed number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold. On the performance image display device 157, a notification is displayed prompting the player to count the number of game medals because the number has exceeded the specified number. When the notification prompting this counting is displayed, the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and the "number of game medals" immediately becomes less than the specified number. Here, the long press operation of the count button 171 is continued. In this example, even if the "number of game medals" falls below the specified number, the notification to encourage counting continues. That is, the notification that prompts counting is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes smaller than the specified number by a predetermined number (for example, 50 x 100 for two times). The arrow indicating the notification period in the figure represents the period during which notification prompting for counting, such as "Please operate the counting button", is being made.

If you set the specification to start the notification when the specified number is reached, and immediately end the notification when the number falls below the specified number, there is a high possibility that only a small number will be counted.In this example, the specified number to start the notification is The notification will continue until the number is less than . By doing so, repetition of notification and counting operations can be reduced. Incidentally, the notification prompting the counting may be made always at a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the number of game medals. You can encourage children to count in large numbers.

Note that the prescribed number may be a threshold for payment, a threshold for lending, or another threshold.

In addition, if the "number of game medals" falls below the specified number due to a bet operation, the number of "game medals" will be reduced by the predetermined number above, although it will only be reduced by a maximum of 3 medals in the first place. Regardless of the value, the notification prompting counting may be continued.

FIG. 85(b) is a diagram showing an example of notification prompting counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout over a plurality of games.

When the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout (15,000 in this example) in a certain game, a notification to prompt counting is started. The notification prompting counting is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. Even if the notification prompting counting is started, the player does not operate the counting button 171 and continues playing the game. As a result, the game continues without the "number of game medals" falling below the second payout threshold. Here, when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout, a notification prompting the player to count is performed once every multiple games (four games in this example). Therefore, for three games after the notification prompting counting is given, no notification prompting counting is made. During the three games in which no notification is given to encourage counting, the performance display such as the game background display displayed on the performance image display device 157 becomes easier to see, which may improve the interest of the game. Note that, when the "number of game medals" falls below the second threshold for payout, the notification prompting counting is no longer performed. Therefore, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second threshold for payout during three games in which no notification to prompt counting is made, the notification to prompt counting will not be made until the second threshold for payout is exceeded. It won't happen. On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during a game in which a notification prompting counting is being made, the notification prompting counting that has been in progress will disappear (become invisible). ).

Next, notification regarding counting will be further explained.

FIG. 86(a) is a diagram illustrating an example in which notification is issued to prompt counting every time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number. Note that each of the figures ((a) to (c)) shown in FIG. 86 shows the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358.

In the example shown in FIG. 86(a), every time the "number of game medals" increases by 1000, a notification is made to prompt counting. First, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 1,000, a message indicating that the number has exceeded 1,000 and prompting the user to count is displayed on the effect image display device 157. These displays continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the next change in the "number of game medals" (the same applies hereinafter). Therefore, it is displayed even during the game. Next, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 2,000, a message indicating that the number has exceeded 2,000 and prompting the user to count is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Furthermore, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 3,000, a message indicating that the number has exceeded 3,000 and prompting the user to count is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Thereafter, these notifications are repeated until the number of sheets exceeds 14,000. Then, when the "number of game medals" reaches the second payout threshold of 15,000 pieces, the display prompting for counting continues until the "number of game medals" becomes less than 15,000 pieces, as shown in FIG. 82(a). It will be displayed. In addition, if the number of game medals reaches 15,000, the message "You have reached 15,000 or more" and a display prompting you to count may continue to be displayed, or if the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than the second payout threshold. If it is below the payout threshold, the actual value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 may be displayed (eg, 15,015 medals are now displayed). Since the number of game medals is displayed periodically, the user can roughly grasp the number of game medals without looking at the game medal number display device 170. Even in the unlikely event that a problem occurs with the game machine and the "number of game medals" disappears, it is easy to know how much has been lost. It should be noted that a display prompting for counting may be displayed in accordance with the time that has passed since the start of a bonus game such as an AT game. For example, after starting a bonus game such as an AT game, a display prompting for counting will be displayed when 10 minutes have passed, a display prompting counting will be displayed when 20 minutes have passed, and a display will be displayed when 30 minutes have passed. A display will be displayed to encourage the following. The display can be performed periodically regardless of the number of game medals.

FIG. 86(b) is a diagram showing an example where the counting button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player.

Here, the AT state is a state advantageous to the player. During the AT state, the "number of game medals" tends to increase due to payout. During the game in this AT state, the effect image display device 157 displays a display (AT game display) suggesting or representing that the player is currently in the AT state. When the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000 pieces during the AT state, as shown in the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. A message will appear prompting you to do so. In this example, the count button 171 continues to be pressed and operated, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a certain value ("100" in this example).

The state advantageous to the player here refers to a state in which it is easy to increase the "number of game medals" by paying out. Therefore, the state is not limited to the AT state, but may be a state in which a bonus (RB, BB) is in operation or an ART state. If the player is in an advantageous state, the "number of game medals" is expected to continue to increase, and it can be said that the entire number of game medals can be counted (outputted to the lending machine 700). However, if all the game medals are counted, the number of coins to be inserted in the next game (for example, 3 coins) will also be counted, and the next game will not be possible unless they are lent out from the lending machine 700. It ends up. Further, even if the situation is advantageous, there may be cases where the consumption of the "number of game medals" happens to be greater than the payout. Therefore, even if the situation is advantageous, a notification is made to the effect that it is advisable to keep a small number of game medals. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 86(b) is in a state where the “number of game medals” has decreased to 100 due to counting in the AT state, and the effect image display device 157 has a message “Stop counting. Please proceed with the game.'' A notification (counting completion guidance notification) is made to the effect that it is advisable to leave a small number of game medals. That is, before the counting of all the game medals is finished, the counting completion guide notification is performed. Note that instead of the counting completion guidance notification shown here, a notification such as ``It is better to leave the gaming value aside'' or ``If you count all the games, you will not be able to play the game'' may be used. In other words, before the counting of all the game medals is completed, a drawback in the case where all the game medals are counted may be notified.

In the slot machine 100 in the example of FIG. 86(b), the automatic counting described above is not performed, and counting ends when the counting button 171 is released. In this example, when the player sees the notification that it is a good idea to leave a small number of game medals, he releases his hand from the counting button 171, and the counting ends when he leaves 50 as the number of game medals. are doing.

FIG. 86(c) is a diagram showing an example in which the counting button 171 is operated in a situation disadvantageous to the player.

Here, the disadvantageous situation for the player refers to a situation in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease if the game is played repeatedly without being lent out. An example is the normal state. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86(c) displays a display (normal game display) that suggests or represents the normal state.

In the example shown in FIG. 86(c), the long press operation of the counting button 171 is continued when the "number of game medals" is 1000, and the "number of game medals" reaches a certain value ("100" in this example). has decreased beyond that. If the situation is disadvantageous to the player, there is a lower possibility that the player will continue playing the game after the counting ends, so no notification will be made to the effect that it is better to keep a small number of "game medals". In this example, the long-press operation of the count button 171 is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes 0. When the "number of game medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays the text "Please stop counting."

FIG. 87(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 86(b). Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 86(b) will be mainly explained.

In the example shown in FIG. 87(a), the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and when the "number of game medals" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting operation continues. To temporarily invalidate the counting operation even if the operation is continued. That is, even if the long-press operation of the counting button 171 is continued, counting is temporarily ended. As a result, the decrease in the "number of game medals" temporarily stops. FIG. 87(a) shows the effect image display device 157 when the "number of game medals" has decreased to 50, and the display screen displays the message "Counting has ended once." ing. To restart counting once it has been forcibly ended, a new operation of the counting button 171 is required.

FIG. 87(b) is a diagram illustrating an example in which counting that has once been forcibly terminated is restarted.

The example shown in FIG. 87(b) is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 87(a), and the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and the "number of game medals" Since the number has decreased to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), counting is forcibly terminated once. In this example, the player has a reason to stop playing even in an advantageous situation, and the player operates the counting button 171 again. That is, the player presses the count button 171 again. In this modification, when the "number of game medals" falls below a predetermined value, counting in increments of "50" by pressing and holding the count button 171 does not work, and even if the button 171 is pressed and holding, it only counts in increments of "1". That is, each time the counting timing (300 ms) arrives, the "number of game medals" decreases by "1". This is because, for the same reason as mentioned above, if all the game medals are counted, the number of coins to be inserted in the next game (for example, 3 coins) will also be counted, and if you do not lend them out from the lending machine 700, Since the next game will not be possible, in order to prevent the number of game medals from reaching 0, only "1" is counted.

Eventually, when the number of game medals reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays the words "Counting has ended".

Note that if the player presses and holds the counting button 171 again, counting in increments of "50" may be started. In this example, since the number of game medals has decreased to "50", it becomes "0" at once, and the output of the "number of game medals" to the lending machine 700 is quickly completed.

The example shown in FIG. 87(c) is an example of the modification described using FIGS. 87(a) and 87(b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state). In the modified example as well, if the player is in a disadvantageous situation, it is effective to press and hold the counting button 171 until the "number of game medals" reaches 0, as in the example shown in FIG. When the "number of medals" reaches 0, the effect image display device 157 displays the text "Please stop counting."

However, even if the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state), in order to give the player motivation to continue playing, the same process as in the case of an advantageous state (FIG. 87(a) and The process shown in FIG. 86(b) or the process shown in FIG. 86(b) may be performed.

[Example of operation when the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off]
Next, an example in which the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off will be described.

FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from rental machine 700 is turned off.

A VL signal is always transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in an on state. If this VL signal is in an off state, it is suspected that the lending machine 700 is not powered on, and lending and counting may not be possible. It is also possible that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected.

The medal number control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off to the game control unit 302 using a command in which the upper byte of the medal number control state command shown in FIG. 11 is 01H. When the game control unit 302 receives VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off, the determination result in step S1007 shown in FIG. 16 is No, and the process continues until the VL signal is turned on. I can't proceed. Therefore, even if the start lever 135 is operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation, and even if the bet buttons 130, 132 are operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation. That is, some of the plurality of types of game progress operations are invalidated. In this embodiment, some operations are operations performed in the first half of one game. Therefore, if the VL signal turns off after the first half of the game starts (the reels start rotating), the second half of the operation (operations of stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation)) will not be valid. be. Therefore, although the game is limited, it is possible to proceed with the game. If the operation becomes invalid while timing the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the operation becomes valid and it is necessary to judge the timing from scratch, which may give an annoying impression. , the possibility of giving this troublesome impression can be reduced. Furthermore, even though it is not possible to count, if the game progress operation up to determining the validity of the internal winning by lottery is enabled, for example, if a result advantageous to the player is obtained and the game suddenly becomes a big success. If the presentation is started, there is a risk that the player's desire to continue playing the game may increase. As a result, there was a possibility that there would be a delay in taking countermeasures when the VL signal was turned off, but the possibility of this delay can be reduced. However, the operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 may be disabled. It is possible to promptly notify the player that the VL signal has been turned off. Note that even if the VL signal turns off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no notification regarding this is performed. Furthermore, if it is treated as an error, an error clearing operation is required, but since the VL signal is in an off state, an abnormality on the rental machine 700 side is suspected, so an error clearing operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). I don't even ask for it. Note that, as in the example below, a configuration may be adopted in which error notification is performed while the VL signal is off.

FIG. 88(a) shows whether the operation (throwing) of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation (throwing/lever operation) of the start lever 135 (lever) are treated as valid or invalid. There is. Further, below that, the value of "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Further, below that, the state of the VL signal is shown.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), when the VL signal is on, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as valid operations. Further, error notification, which will be described later, is not performed.

When the VL signal is turned off, the operations of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. Furthermore, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 88(a) displays text such as "Communication with rental machine not established." Note that the error notification may be a notification that the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 is invalid. For example, a text display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid" or "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid because communication with the lending machine has not been established" may be displayed.

Next, a modification of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, regardless of the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, when the VL signal turns off, the operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. In the modified example described below, the response differs depending on the value of the "number of game medals". That is, in the first modification, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are performed in a state where the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold (in this example, 15,000, which is the second threshold for payout). As shown in FIG. 88(a), if the VL signal is turned off (for example, in the state of 980 sheets), it is treated as an invalid operation. The fact that the "number of game medals" is small means that the player could end the game at any time. Therefore, the player should be made aware of the fact that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established, and the clerk should promptly Promote repair. On the other hand, even if the VL signal is turned off while the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to the certain threshold value, it is treated as a valid operation.

FIG. 88(b) shows a first modification example in which the "number of game medals" is 15,550, which is 15,000 or more, which is the second threshold for payout.

When the "number of game medals" reaches the payout threshold, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the input operation for the next game (operation of the bet buttons 130, 132) becomes invalid, and there is no opportunity to operate the start lever 135 or the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 88(b), if the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, the "number of game medals" eventually reaches the threshold for payout, and the next game cannot be played. Until this happens, we do not intentionally stop the progress of the game so that players can enjoy it. Furthermore, the fact that the game continues even if the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout means that the player is often in an advantageous state (for example, AT state, etc.), and in this state, the player cannot continue playing the game. Stopping the game is highly likely to reduce the interest in the game, which is undesirable, so the player does not intentionally stop the progress of the game.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 88(b), the progress of the game does not stop even if the VL signal is turned off, but even in this modification, when the VL signal is turned off, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157. is displayed.

FIG. 89 shows a second modification example in which the operation differs depending on whether the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value.

The state shown in FIG. 89(a) is a state in which the number of game medals is 14,000, which is less than a certain threshold (15,000, which is the second payout threshold in this example). In the second modification, even if the VL signal is turned off in this state, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. Therefore, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are effective. However, even in the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The state shown in FIG. 89(b) is a state in which the number of game medals is 15,550, which is more than a certain threshold (second threshold for payout). In the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off in this state, some of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 performed in the first half of one game are invalidated. Additionally, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The second modification shown in FIG. 89 is the exact opposite of the first modification, but the fact that the "number of game medals" is small means that the game may have just started, so it does not interfere with the progress of the game that has just started. There is a purpose. In addition, in the slot machine 100, it cannot be said that there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" may disappear no matter what kind of trouble occurs, so the "number of game medals" is large. If the "number of game medals" disappears in this state, the disadvantage will be great. Therefore, when the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than a certain threshold (second threshold for payout), the progress of the game is stopped and prompt repair by the clerk is encouraged. Furthermore, if there is a large number of game medals, it can be assumed that the player can perform counting operations at any time, so the player should be made aware of the fact that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established. The aim is to encourage store staff to make repairs as soon as possible.

From what has been explained above, the way to respond when the VL signal is turned off changes depending on the value of the "number of game medals" and whether the situation is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player. Note that an advantageous state for the player here refers to a state in which it is easy to increase the number of game medals by paying out (for example, AT state, ART state, BB state, BR state, etc.), and an unfavorable state. is a state (for example, a normal state) in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease as the game continues.

When the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, when the VL signal is turned off, one of the multiple types of game progress operations is performed as shown in FIG. 88(a). At least some operations are disabled. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold in a situation that is advantageous to the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, there are multiple types of game progress as shown in FIG. 88(b). All operations in the operation are treated as valid operations.

Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. All operations may be treated as valid operations. On the other hand, when the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than a certain threshold value in a situation that is advantageous to the player, when the VL signal is turned off, one of the multiple types of game progress operations is performed, as shown in FIG. 89(b). The operations of at least some of them may be disabled.

If the value of the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, the player may end the game at any time. Therefore, when the VL signal is turned off, in order to make the player aware of the fact that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, and to encourage the store staff to repair the situation at an early stage, at least one of the multiple types of game progress operations can be performed. operations are disabled. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in an advantageous state for the player, there is a possibility that the player has just entered an advantageous state. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations, so that the progress of the game is not hindered.

Alternatively, if the value of the "number of game medals" exceeds a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous situation for the player, there is a possibility that counting is not necessary. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations may be treated as valid operations so as not to hinder the progress of the game. On the other hand, if the value of the ``number of game medals'' is less than a certain threshold value in a situation that is advantageous to the player, the player is made to notice early and the store staff In order to encourage early recovery, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations may be disabled when the VL signal is turned off.

FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off.

In the above explanation, even if the VL signal turns off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no error cancellation operation is requested to the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). However, in the example shown in FIG. 90(a), it is treated as an error on the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) side, and a request is made to the main control section 300 (slot machine 100) to perform an error cancellation operation. As explained above, there is a high possibility that the VL signal is turned off because the lending machine 700 is not powered on or the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected. Therefore, even if an error cancellation operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, there is a high possibility that an error will occur again. However, by indicating an error, a clerk can be called, and the clerk can turn on the rental machine 700.

The example shown in FIG. 90(b) is an example in which the game can continue until the count button 171 is operated even if the VL signal is turned off.

In the example shown in FIG. 90(b), even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. The fact that the VL signal is turned off means that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established, and the rental machine 700 side can also determine that there is an abnormality and issue an error notification. If an error notification is made on the rental machine 700 side immediately after the VL signal is turned off, the clerk can be called without the need for the notification on the slot machine 100 side immediately. Furthermore, since communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, a counting notification may not be sent to the lending machine 700 even if the counting button 171 is operated. Therefore, in this example, the slot machine 100 side makes a notification at the timing when the count button 171 is operated. By doing this, the slot machine 100 can make notifications with the minimum number of opportunities, and by suppressing excessive notifications, the player can play the game comfortably.

Note that after the operation of the counting button 171 is detected, the notification on the slot machine 100 side continues until the VL signal is turned back on.

[About the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]
If the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as the AT state or bonus state, is greater than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, it is advantageous to the player. In this situation, it becomes difficult to finish the counting process. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 and it is possible to count less than 10 medals in the minimum time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game. If counting is performed while the player is playing the AT game, the number of game medals will continue to increase during the AT game. Therefore, when a performance associated with counting is performed while proceeding with the AT game, the execution period of this performance becomes long, making it difficult to perform a performance with an ending scene that anticipates the end of counting, for example. Further, when a counting effect (FIG. 63, etc.) is executed in connection with the counting process, this counting effect interferes with other effects, reducing the interest of the game. On the other hand, by designing the game so that the amount of increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous gaming state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to counting processing, such problems can be made less likely to occur. Can be done. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 and it is possible to count more than 10 medals in the minimum time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, proceed with the AT game. When counting is performed while playing the AT game, the number of game medals continues to decrease. For example, if it is possible to count 50 sheets every 300 ms when the counting button 171 is held down, it is expected that the number of sheets will decrease by approximately 700 sheets in 4.1 seconds. Therefore, when performing an effect associated with counting while proceeding with the AT game, it is possible to estimate the end of the execution period of this effect. Note that, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability may be increased) depending on the execution time of the counting process.

Note that the above-mentioned counting performance is not limited to a configuration in which the counting performance is ended in accordance with the counting process, but may be configured such that the counting performance may be ended even when the counting process continues. The execution time of the counting process for transferring the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 becomes longer as the number of game medals increases. For this reason, if the counting effect is performed uniformly according to the execution period of the counting process, the counting effect may be executed for a long time, reducing the interest of the game, or the counting effect may interfere with other effects. There is a possibility that problems may occur. This problem can be prevented in some cases by terminating the counting performance even when the counting process continues. Note that such a configuration includes, for example, a configuration in which the counting effect is terminated depending on the gaming situation or the passage of time, or a configuration in which the counting effect is terminated when the content determined as the counting effect is executed. . Note that if the counting process ends before these counting performance termination conditions are satisfied, the counting performance may be ended or the counting performance may be continued.

Furthermore, the content of the counting effect may change depending on the amount of game medals that have been counted. In this case, the performance content may be set based on the amount of game medals in the counting process, or the performance content may be set based on the cumulative number of game medals in the counting process in an advantageous state. You may also do so. Further, for example, when the amount of game medals that have been counted exceeds a predetermined value, a setting suggestion effect may be executed (or the execution probability may be increased). After the player acquires a large number of game medals, the player starts counting and can select a game move. In addition, regarding such a counting performance according to the amount of game medals, if the counting process and counting performance are terminated midway due to reasons such as unintentionally releasing the counting button 171, the interest in the game will decrease. There is a risk of it getting lost. Therefore, even after a counting performance ends midway, if a new counting process is started within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second), if a new counting process is started within a predetermined time (for example, one second), It is also possible to restart the lost counting performance from the middle. In addition, the counting effect continues to be executed within a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) after the counting process ends, and a new counting process is not started while this counting effect continues. In this case, the counting effect that is currently being executed may be continued as is. With these configurations, it is possible to prevent the counting effect from disappearing due to the end of the counting process due to an unintended operation. Note that the above-mentioned predetermined time may be the same as, for example, the determination time of long press of the counting button 171.

Further, for example, when operating the count button 171 while performing a game progress operation, it is difficult to further operate the effect button. If a performance that requests an operation on such an operating means is performed while the counting performance is being performed, there is a possibility that an erroneous operation may be induced. For this reason, while the counting performance is being performed, the performance that requires operation of some kind of operating means may not be performed (or the probability of execution may be reduced). Furthermore, effects that become extremely difficult to recognize when executed simultaneously with the counting effects may be similarly restricted. That is, a configuration may be provided in which a performance is limited during execution of the counting performance. Note that the performance does not have to require operation of the operating means; for example, it is recommended not to execute a performance that involves a freeze that prevents the game from progressing, or a performance that takes a long time to execute and the result is not known until the end. It's okay.

For example, if the counting process is started while the side lamps are on, which is an advantageous effect, the side lamp effect changes to a counting effect. may be replaced with a counting performance. Furthermore, when starting some kind of performance while the counting performance is being executed, the counting performance may be replaced by a performance that will be executed later.

In addition, the content of the counting effect changes depending on the degree of game progress while the counting process is being executed, such as the character changing (for example, growing) when the game progresses while the counting process is being executed. You may also do so.

In addition, when the number of game medals reaches 0 and the counting process and counting effect are finished, by keeping the counting button 171 pressed, if a new number of game medals is acquired and the counting process starts, it will be possible to The counting performance that has ended may be restarted from where it left off.

Furthermore, at least some of the game progress operations may be restricted while the counting process is being executed, such as not being able to start the next game while the counting process is being executed.

[About the configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]
In the embodiment described above, by pressing and holding the count button 171, the number of game medals can be transferred to the lending machine 700 in increments of up to 50 game medals. FIG. 91(a) shows the change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is held down from a state where there are 120 game medals. Specifically, 50 of the 120 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, then 50 of the remaining 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and then the remaining 20 are transferred to the lending machine 700. The flow from when all the game medal numbers are transferred to the lending machine 700 until the game medal number becomes 0 is shown.

In the above counting process, the value of the current number of game medals is temporarily set as the number of game medals for counting judgment (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the counting process is executed based on this number of game medals for counting judgment. (Figure 34). At this time, if there is an increase in the number of game medals (by payout or settlement operation) after the number of game medals for count determination is set, the content is reflected in the number of game medals for count determination that is set next. FIG. 91(b) shows the change in the number of game medals when 8 game medals are paid out while 70 game medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow shown in FIG. 91(a). has been done. In this example, 50 of the remaining 70 game medals have been transferred to the lending machine 700, leaving 20 game medals remaining, and the 8 payout amount is added to the remaining 28 game medals. After that, all remaining game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the number of game medals becomes 0.

In the embodiment described above, as in the example shown in FIG. As a result, the number of game medals at the time the counting process started (120 in Figure 91(b)) and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process (128 in Figure 91(b)) no longer match, and the counting process This may result in a workload when the data needs to be checked later. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 91(c), the increase in the number of game medals (due out or payment operation) while the counting process is continuing is not reflected immediately, and for example, the increase in the number of game medals is This increase may be reflected after the number of game medals reaches 0 or after the counting process that was being continued is finished by releasing the counting button 171 before the number of game medals becomes 0. For example, if you continue to press and hold the count button 171, count the 120 sheets that were stored when you started pressing and holding the count button 171, and then count the 8 sheets that increased while pressing and holding the count button 171. do. For example, if you release the long press on the count button 171 midway, the long press on the count button 171 will be resumed after counting 60 of the 120 sheets that were stored when you started holding the count button 171. I counted 68 pieces that I had memorized at the time. After restarting, since the number of game medals at the time of starting the counting process is 68, the 68 medals are counted in the order of 50 → 18. In FIG. 91(c), while 70 game medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 91(a), 8 coins are paid out, but until the number of game medals reaches 0. does not reflect this increase (same flow as in Figure 91(a)), but this increase is reflected after the number of game medals reaches 0, and the counting process continues until the number of game medals reaches 0. It is shown that In this configuration, the number of game medals at the time the counting process starts (120 in FIG. 91(c)) and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process until the number of game medals reaches 0 (FIG. 91(c)) 120 sheets) can be matched.

In addition, in FIG. 91(e), while the number of 70 game medals is being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 91(a), 8 coins are paid out. Immediately after counting the 120 coins that were stored when the game started, the 8 coins that were paid out were counted. With this configuration, the time required for counting can be shortened.

Note that if the number of game medals increases multiple times while the counting process is continuing, the total value of all these increases may be reflected later, or the count process may continue. If there are, the number of game medals may be reflected one by one each time the number of game medals becomes 0.

Note that the display on the game medal number display device 170 when the above configuration is adopted may also be a display that matches the change in the number of game medals. Further, an increase in the number of game medals (due out or payment operation) while the counting process is continuing may be immediately reflected on the display (reflected in the display of a decrease in the number of game medals). However, regarding the amount of change in value due to the counting process in this case, the actual value of the number of game medals and the value of the number of game medals on the display are the same (a state in which there is a deviation by the amount of increase). FIG. 91(d) shows a flow when a configuration is adopted in which an increase in the number of game medals (payout and settlement operations) is immediately reflected on the display, compared to the flow in FIG. 91(c). There is. In this configuration, the actual value of the number of game medals and the value of the number of game medals on the display will be in a state where there is a deviation by the above-mentioned increase, but they will be in a state where they match at the end of the counting process. Even if you release the counting button 171 to end the counting process before the number of game medals reaches 0, the increase will be reflected in the number of game medals at that point, so the value of the actual number of game medals will differ. The values of the number of game medals on the display match.

Note that the timing to reflect the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is released. In this case, by operating the count button 171 anew, the reflected increase can be transferred to the lending machine 700. Alternatively, the timing may be the timing when the number of game medals reaches 0 while the counting process continues, and in this case, the reflected increase can be transferred to the lending machine 700 without operating the counting button 171 again. It may also be possible to move it (the counting process continues, FIG. 91(e)).

Incidentally, the increase in the number of game medals may be due to payout or settlement operations, but either one of these may be the target of the configuration described in FIG. 91(c), or both may be the target.

[About the setting to reduce the number of bets by operating the bet button]
In the embodiment described above, if you want to change the number of game medals to 1 bet after placing a bet of 3, operate the settlement button 134 to temporarily return the 3 bets to the "number of game medals", and then By operating the bet button 130 for one bet again, the current number of bets can be reduced to one. In this case, it is necessary to operate the settlement button 134 and the bet button 130, but it may be configured such that this operation can be performed by operating the bet button 130 once. An example of such a configuration is a configuration in which when the bet button 130 is operated while the current bet amount is at the maximum value, the settlement button process (FIG. 18) is executed and then the process corresponding to the bet button operation is executed. Can be mentioned. In addition, when the bet button 130 is operated while the current number of bets is at the maximum value, the amount of change in the number of bets from the maximum value to the minimum value (in the above example, the difference is 2) is set as the number of coins to be settled. In addition to transmitting the settlement command (FIG. 13), the current bet value may be set to the minimum value. In this configuration, a part of the bet amount is settled by operating the bet button 130, and no separate deposit processing or deposit command is required. Note that these configurations are an example of a configuration in which the current number of bets is set to the minimum value based on the operating means that can set the minimum value of the number of bets when the current number of bets is the maximum value. Equivalent to.

Note that when the above configuration is adopted, the current bet number can be changed from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → 2, etc. by repeating the operation of the bet button 130, and only by operating the bet button 130. You can now change the settings for the number of bets.

Note that if there is a settlement sound that can be output in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 and an input sound that can be output in response to the operation of the bet button 130, the bet button 130 when the current bet amount changes from the maximum value to the minimum value For this operation, the checkout sound and the input sound may be output continuously. However, since there is a risk of confusion for the player if two types of sounds are output for a single operation, the current number of bets will change from the maximum value to the minimum value when the bet button 130 is operated. , the input sound may be output without outputting the payment sound. In addition, in response to the operation of the settlement button 134, characters etc. indicating that the settlement has been made are displayed on the screen of the effect image display device 157, and when the bet button 130 is operated when the current bet amount changes from the maximum value to the minimum value. On the other hand, the screen of the effect image display device 157 may not display characters indicating that payment has been made. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding that he or she has operated the settlement button 134 instead of the bet button 130.

[About the production according to the number of game medals]
Hereinafter, a configuration for executing different effects depending on the number of game medals will be explained using FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of a performance performed according to the number of game medals.

In the above embodiment, information on the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 via the game control unit 302 (medal number control state command and security command ). The following example is an example of an operation for executing different effects depending on the value of the number of game medals. In this example, in the AT state, a normal performance is executed until the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000 in this example), and a special performance is executed when the number reaches the predetermined number.

First, FIG. 92(a1) shows the situation at the start of the AT state (the number of game medals at the start=500), and FIG. 92(a2) shows the state of the game in the AT state. FIG. 92(a3) shows what happens when medals are acquired in the AT state, and FIG. 92(a4) shows what happens when the AT state ends. In addition, in the AT state, the value of the number of game medals is displayed as the "possession" value in the upper left corner of the screen, and the number of medals acquired after entering the AT state is displayed in the "...GET" section in the upper right corner of the screen. Displayed.

In the flow of FIGS. 92(a1) to (a4), since the number of game medals does not exceed 3000 in the AT state, the special performance is not performed and the normal performance (FIG. 92(a2)) is performed.

Next, FIGS. 92(b1) to (b3) show an example in which a special effect is executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this example, from a state where the normal performance is being executed because the number of game medals has not reached the predetermined number (FIG. 92 (b1)), to a state where the number of game medals has reached the predetermined number by acquiring medals ( 92(b2)), and then a state where a special effect is being executed (FIG. 92(b3)). In this special performance, the background, the color of the operation navigation, and the BGM will be different from the normal performance. In other words, the performance changes when a large number of game medals have been obtained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the different effects are not limited to the above example of special effects, and various effects can be used. This different production is not limited to a configuration in which different productions are used, for example, when a base production is being executed, a different production can be inserted into a part of it, resulting in a different production as a whole. Good too. For example, when displaying the number of game medals and the number of medals earned, the color may be changed for each digit to create a rainbow color, or the color of each digit may be changed periodically. The numerical values may have different colors and sizes. Further, the state in which the performance is made different is not limited to the AT state, but may be any state where the performance is different when the player is in an advantageous state.

Further, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the performance is switched immediately after the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but it is sufficient that the performance executed differs depending on whether or not the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number. The presentation may be switched when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number and further satisfies some condition (for example, playing the number of games, winning a switching lottery), or whether the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number or not. It is also possible to have a different ending.

Furthermore, when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value may be executed. In the example of FIG. 92(c1), when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value (in this example, a family crest display) is executed at the ending.

In addition, it is not limited to a configuration in which a different effect or display is always executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but a different effect or display is more likely to be executed than when the number of game medals does not reach a predetermined number. It may be a configuration.

In addition, for example, when the number of game medals reaches 3000, the above special effect is executed, and when the number of game medals reaches 2000, a display suggesting the setting value is executed at the ending. The value of the number of game medals, which is a trigger for making the values different, may be provided separately.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was described in which the number of game medals is used to determine whether or not to execute a different effect or display. A similar effect may be achieved even when the number of medals is used as the determination target, or the total value of the number of game medals and the number of held medals is used as the determination target. Further, the value used at this time is not limited to the total number of held medals, but a portion thereof (for example, when the number of held medals is 5000, 1000 of them) may be used. When adopting such a configuration, information regarding the number of medals held may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, if the credit balance is handled by the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or by the host server, the above number of medals can be calculated using the value of this credit balance or the value obtained by converting the credit balance into the number of game medals. A configuration similar to that using . In this way, the card inserted into the lending machine 700 and the information regarding the gaming value managed by the host server may be used to determine whether or not to perform a different effect or display.

Furthermore, for example, a different effect is executed when the number of game medals is 2000 or more and the number of held medals is 5000 or more, that is, the number of game medals and the number of held medals (or either one) satisfy some condition. It is also possible to use a configuration in which a plurality of types of determination targets are used and the results are combined, such that different effects are performed depending on the case. Note that the value of the above judgment target may not be displayed, but if the value to be judged is displayed as in the example above, the relationship between the judgment target and the performance cannot be grasped. It is expected that the game will become easier and more interesting.

Furthermore, in the above example, a configuration has been described in which the number of game medals and the number of held medals are used as the determination target for whether or not to perform different effects or displays, but the number of acquired medals in the AT state may be used as the determination target. FIGS. 93(d1) to (d7) show an example in which a special performance is executed when the number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). Of this flow, FIGS. 93(d2) to (d4) show the case where the value of the number of game medals reaches 3000, similar to the case explained using FIGS. 92(b1) to (b3). However, in this example, the execution of the special performance is determined based on the number of acquired medals, so unlike FIGS. 92(b1) to (b3), no special performance is performed at this point. Thereafter, the state becomes such that the number of acquired medals reaches a predetermined number (here, 3000) (FIG. 93(d5)), and thereafter the state enters a state where a special performance is executed (FIG. 93(d6)). In this example as well, the presentation changes as the number of acquired medals increases, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in this example, it is shown that setting suggestions similar to those in FIG. 92(c1) are displayed because the number of acquired medals has reached 2000.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was explained in which a different effect or display is executed when the number of game medals, the number of held medals, and the number of acquired medals reach a predetermined number. The configuration may be such that the number of medals is used, and the number of acquired medals is used to perform other parts of the performance, as appropriate. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the above-described performances can be executed in parallel, such as a performance using the number of held medals and a performance using the number of acquired medals. In these configurations, for example, if the counting process is not performed in a situation that is advantageous to the player, the number of acquired medals may exceed the number of medals held, but when such a situation occurs, a different effect is executed. In this way, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of determination targets are used and the results are combined.

[About operations when errors overlap]
Error-related operations will be described below with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when an overflow of the number of game medals occurs. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occurs. FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation when an error in which the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit and a medal number control disconnection error (error code E0) occur simultaneously.

In the above embodiment, the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100 (RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350) can be transferred to the lending machine 700 by operating the counting button 171 (counting process). In FIGS. 94(a1) to (a3), from a state where there are 1336 game medals (FIG. 94(a1)), the count button 171 is operated (FIG. 94(a2)), and all the game medals are lent out. As a result of the transmission to the machine 700, a series of steps until the value of the game medal number display device 170 (the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100) becomes 0 (FIG. 94 (a3)) is shown. .

In addition, in the above embodiment, 16383 is set as the upper limit of the number of game medals, and when a winning combination with a payout is won and the sum of this payout and the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit, an overflow state occurs. (The response command becomes "abnormal" in FIG. 50). In this overflow state, the payout-based addition process is not executed and the overflow state is in a waiting state for resolution, which can be said to be a type of error. This overflow state can be resolved by operating the counting button 171 to transfer the number of game medals to the lending machine 700. In FIGS. 94(b1) to (b4), the number of game medals changes from the upper limit value (FIG. 94(b1)) to an overflow state (FIG. 94(b2)) after winning a combination with a payout. After that, press and hold the count button 171 (FIG. 94(b3), move 50 as the number of game medals to the lending machine 700, and decrease the value of the number of game medals display device 170 by 1), and the overflow state will be resolved (FIG. 94(b3). The series of steps up to b4)) is shown. Note that the message "Error has been cleared" in FIG. 94(b4) indicates that the overflow condition has been cleared, and is displayed for several seconds and then erased. Furthermore, when the overflow condition is resolved, the payout amount will be added to the number of game medals. In this example, the count button 171 is pressed for a long time, but if the count button 171 is not pressed for a long time, 1 will be transferred to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals. In this case, the overflow state can be canceled by repeatedly pressing the counting button 171 until the number of game medals becomes equal to or less than the upper limit value. In any case, the overflow state can be canceled by operating the counting button 171.

Further, in the above embodiment, the configuration is such that the game control unit 302 can detect various errors (for example, the error shown in FIG. 9(b)) that hinder the progress of the game. Since these errors require countermeasures on the part of the store, the system is configured to disable the player from proceeding with the game and to notify them of these errors. 95(c1) to (c3), the state changes from a state in which no error has occurred (FIG. 95(c1)) to a state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section (FIG. 95(c2)), and then the A series of steps are shown in which the user takes action and the reset button R is operated until the error is resolved (FIG. 95(c3)). The message "Error E0 has been resolved" in Figure 95 (c3) indicates that the error that occurred (in this example, the disconnection error in the medal number control section) has been resolved, and after being displayed for a few seconds, will be deleted. Note that the reset button R is a button for transmitting a reset signal to each control section, and is provided inside the gaming machine so that the player cannot operate it.

As explained above, in the slot machine 100 of the above embodiment, errors related to the game control unit 302 that need to be canceled by the operation of the store (for example, the abnormal game order error shown in FIG. 9(b), the chip ID number mismatch, etc.) There are two types of errors: a game control error, etc.) and an error related to the medal number control unit 350 that can be canceled by a player's operation (for example, an overflow state, hereinafter referred to as a medal number control error). A medal number control error is an error that does not have a serious effect on game progress compared to a game control error. For this reason, if these errors occur overlappingly, it is conceivable to give priority to the game control error with high importance and eliminate it. An example of the operation when such a configuration is adopted will be described below. In addition, in the following explanation, examples of a medal number control section disconnection error and an overflow state will be explained, but errors related to the game control section 302 and errors related to the medal number control section 350 are not limited to these errors. A similar cancellation method can be applied to errors.

FIG. 96(d1) shows a state in which the number of game medals is at the upper limit, and it is assumed that a winning combination with a payout is entered from there, resulting in an overflow state. FIG. 96(d2) shows a state in which a message prompting the user to operate the counting button 171 in order to release the overflow state is displayed. The overflow state can be canceled by operating the count button 171, but here it is assumed that a medal number control section disconnection error occurs before this operation is performed (the game control error and the medal number control error overlap). . FIG. 96(d3) shows a state in which the message shown in FIG. 96(d2) has been cleared and a message indicating that a medal number control unit disconnection error has occurred is displayed. Note that in the above example, the message indicating the overflow state (Fig. 96 (d2)) is cleared when a disconnection error occurs in the medal number control section. Display a message indicating that an error has occurred over the message indicating that an overflow condition has occurred, or display a message indicating that an overflow condition has occurred in a position that does not interfere with the message indicating that a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section. Messages related to both errors may be displayed. Furthermore, when displaying messages related to both errors, a configuration may be used in which a display different from a display when an error occurs alone is used.

In a state where a game control error and a medal number control error overlap, even if the counting button 171 is operated, the overflow state is not canceled because the counting process is not executed. At this time, a message indicating that the operation of the count button 171 is invalid is displayed. In addition to the message shown in FIG. 96(d3), when the count button 171 is operated, the operation of the count button 171 is invalid, and the disconnection error in the medal number control section is first resolved. A message is displayed prompting you to do so. With this configuration, it is possible to process the medal number control unit disconnection error with priority.

It is assumed that the store then takes action and the reset button R is operated to resolve the error and return to the overflow state (elimination of duplication of game control error and medal number control error). FIG. 96(d5) shows a state in which a message indicating that the medal number control unit disconnection error has been resolved is displayed. FIG. 96(d6) shows that after this message is cleared, a message similar to that in FIG. 96(d2) is displayed. Thereafter, by operating the counting button 171 as explained in FIG. 94, counting processing can be executed and the overflow state can be canceled. FIGS. 96(d7) and (d8) show that the overflow state has been resolved by pressing and holding the count button 171 in the same way as FIGS. 94(b3) and (b4). In this case, the payout amount will be added to the number of game medals after the overflow condition is resolved.

In order to realize the above operation, the process corresponding to the operation of the operation means (counting button 171 in the above example) used to resolve the medal number control error is not executed while the game control error is occurring. Good too. 97(e1) to (e3), the state changes from a state in which no error has occurred (FIG. 97(e1)) to a state in which a disconnection error has occurred in the medal number control section (FIG. 97(e2)), and this error Although the counting button 171 (operating means for canceling the overflow state) was operated during the occurrence of the overflow, a message is displayed indicating that the operation is invalid (the counting process is not executed) (Fig. 97 ( e3)) has been shown.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was described in which the operating means for canceling the game control error and the operating means for canceling the medal number control error are different. Here, for example, the error canceling operation means for canceling the game control error and the medal number control error may be the same, such as allowing both errors to be canceled by the reset button R. Note that the error canceling operation means at this time may be operable by the player or may be inoperable (for example, an operation means installed inside the game machine). In this configuration, if a game control error occurs while a medal number control error is occurring, the game control error is canceled by operating the error canceling operation means (the medal number control error is not canceled, and the game control error is canceled). Control errors are prioritized and canceled), so that highly important game control errors can be prioritized and canceled.

[About notification of counting process (1)]
In a situation advantageous to the player, a performance may be performed to liven up the game, but the configuration described below is such that the volume of this performance is reduced while the counting button 171 is operated (counting process). This provides a case where the sound is lowered (or muted). With this configuration, the player can be made aware of the fact that the counting process is being executed by changing the sound volume of the performance, and can be made to concentrate on the counting process. This change in volume corresponds to an example of count notification. Note that, hereinafter, the count notification based on the change in the performance sound volume will be referred to as count notification A. Here, we will mainly explain a configuration that changes the volume of the performance by counting processing, but a configuration that changes the performance in a state advantageous to the player by counting processing (for example, a change in volume, a change in sound quality, a change in display) (a part of the lamp may change, the color of the lamp, the lighting mode may change).

In some cases, a so-called demonstration performance is not executed in a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, an AT state, a bonus state), and a demonstration performance is performed in a state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a normal state), but this configuration In this case, the performance in a state advantageous to the player is continuously executed. The counting notification A allows the user to grasp the execution of the counting process even in such a configuration.

Although the count notification A has the above-mentioned effects, there is a problem in that depending on the timing of execution, it may make the production of important scenes difficult to understand. Here, the state in which all reels have stopped rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect that is executed is less important, so all reels have stopped rotating. The configuration may be such that the count notification A is executed in the state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels is performed, there may be a winning performance, etc., so if a predetermined period of time has passed after the last stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. The configuration may be such that the count notification A is executed on the condition that the vehicle is stopped. In addition, count notification A is issued on the condition that all reels have stopped rotating after the effects caused by the last stop operation on the reels have been executed (for example, when switching to a demo effect). It may also be configured to execute. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of counting processing, a configuration is adopted in which the volume of the performance is reduced (or muted) as time passes since the last stop operation was performed on the reels (for example, a configuration aimed at reducing power consumption). In this case, the degree of each volume reduction may be made different so that it can be distinguished from the reduction in the performance volume due to the count notification A. Further, in the case where performance volume reduction due to passage of time and execution of count notification A overlap, a configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to volume reduction due to count notification A.

On the other hand, when any of the reels is rotating, the game is being executed, and the performance to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification A is not executed while any of the reels is rotating.

Further, depending on the operation during the game, a performance may be executed using this as an opportunity. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 may trigger the performance of the next game, and the performance of the next game may be executed. There are cases where an operation of the operating means is used as an opportunity to execute a performance that increases the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification A that is being executed is terminated (for example, the volume that has been changed is returned) in response to an operation on some operation means.

In addition, in the above description, it is determined whether or not to output the counting sound depending on the number of sheets to be counted (for example, as shown in FIG. 63), and that the counting sound is made different depending on the operating time of the counting button 171 (for example, 63), but when the above-mentioned count notification A is executed, a count sound corresponding to such a count process may be output. Also, for example, while the above counting notification A is executed only when all reels have stopped rotating, the counting sound can be output at any time in response to the counting process. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a counting sound is output separately from the counting notification A. The counting sound added here can be changed while changing the volume depending on the situation, for example, set the volume to 50% while the reels are rotating, and set the volume to 100% while the reels are stopped. You may also add Further, it is also possible to combine not only the counting sound but also various effects corresponding to the counting process (for example, the output of the counting sound, a count display related to the counting process, and a combination thereof) with the counting notification A. Examples of various effects for such counting processing include outputting a counting sound in accordance with the execution of the counting processing, and allowing the counting display to be performed after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels have stopped). (while the reels are spinning, only the counting sound is output). In addition, as another example, the counting sound is output in accordance with the execution of the counting process, and the counting sound is displayed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) after the game ends (after the third stop operation, after all reels have stopped). After that, execution is allowed (only the counting sound is output while the reels are rotating).

[About notification of counting process (2)]
In the above description, it is determined whether or not to output the counting sound depending on the number of sheets to be counted (for example, FIG. 63), and the counting sound is made different depending on the operating time of the counting button 171 (for example, FIG. 63). , a configuration that outputs a counting sound according to the counting process was mentioned.

In a situation that is advantageous to the player, an effect may be executed to liven up the game, but the configuration described below can output a counting sound while the counting button 171 is operated (counting process). At the same time, a case is provided in which the effect sound is maintained in an advantageous state. With this configuration, the effect sound in an advantageous state may be maintained even during the counting process, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Furthermore, the counting sound allows the player to understand that the counting process is being executed. This counting sound corresponds to an example of counting notification. In addition, below, the counting notification by this counting sound will be called counting notification B.

Although the count notification B has the above-mentioned effects, there is a problem in that depending on the timing of execution, it may make the production of important scenes difficult to understand. Here, the state in which all reels have stopped rotating corresponds to the period between games, and the effect that is executed is less important, so all reels have stopped rotating. The configuration may be such that the count notification B is executed in the state. Furthermore, after the last stop operation on the reels is performed, there may be a winning performance, etc., so if a predetermined period of time has passed after the last stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. The configuration may be such that the count notification B is executed on the condition that the vehicle is stopped. In addition, count notification B is issued on the condition that all reels have stopped rotating after the final stop operation for the reels has been performed and all reels have been executed (for example, when switching to a demo performance). It may also be configured to execute.

On the other hand, when any of the reels is rotating, the game is being executed, and the performance to be executed has a high degree of importance. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification B is not executed while any of the reels is rotating.

Further, depending on the operation during the game, a performance may be executed using this as an opportunity. For example, in a state where all the reels have stopped rotating as described above, the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 may trigger the performance of the next game, and the performance of the next game may be executed. There are cases where an operation of the operating means is used as an opportunity to execute a performance that increases the interest of the game. For this reason, a configuration may be adopted in which the count notification B is not executed after any operation is performed on any operating means.

In addition, in the above description, the case where the counting notification B is executed and the case where it is not executed were explained, but for example, when there is a counting sound of the first aspect and a counting sound of the second aspect as the counting sound ( For example, the melody may be different, the tone color, the number of notes, the volume, etc. may be different). In other words, the case where the count notification B is executed is read as the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output, and the case where the count notification B is not executed is read as the case where the count sound of the second aspect is output. good. Since there are various types of sounds, for example, if the counting sound of the second aspect is a type of sound that does not significantly interfere with the production of an advantageous state, the counting process can be executed without reducing the interest of the game. The player can be made aware that the game is inside.

Furthermore, for example, when the counting sound of the first mode is output, when the counting effect of the first mode is executed, when the counting sound of the second mode is output, when the counting effect of the second mode is executed. , respectively. Since there are various types of performances, not just audio, for example, if the counting performance of the second aspect is a type of performance that does not interfere much with the production of an advantageous state, it can be done without reducing the interest of the game. The player can be made aware that the counting process is being executed.

[Example of notification of counting process]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the configuration of the count notifications (count notification A, count notification B) explained above will be described using FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation when an output permission period for the sound is provided when outputting the counting sound for the counting process. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 98(a), and FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of FIG. 98(b).

98(a) and 98(b) both show a configuration in which the output of the counting sound is permitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the third stop operation in the AT state, and the counting sound stops when a bet operation is performed. This is an example of operation. FIGS. 98(a) and 98(b) show a period during which this counting sound is permitted and a period during which the counting sound is output in response to the operation of the counting button 171 within this period. It is assumed that in the AT state, the AT effect sound corresponding to the AT state is continuously output, except when the counting sound is output.

The example in FIG. 98(a) shows the timing (a1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 99(a1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this situation, FIG. 99(a2) shows an example in which the operation navigation is displayed at timing (a2) after the start operation. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 99(a2) to (a7), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as a value of "possession", and the upper right frame is displayed as the value acquired in the AT state. It is assumed that the cumulative total of the number of game medals is displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the count button 171 is pressed and held for a period of time after the third stop operation and before the bet button operation for the next game is performed. FIG. 98(a) shows the operation period of this counting button 171. Timings (a3) to (a7) shown in FIG. 98(a) will be sequentially explained below.

First, timing (a3) is the timing after the third stop operation and before the count button 171 is operated. FIG. 99 (a3) shows that, at this timing (a3), the performance when winning a prize (here, the number of game medals is 8) is being executed.

The following timing (a4) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the third stop operation. At this timing (a4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the display in FIG. 99(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 99(a4), and the AT performance sound continues as is. There is. Then, when the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed, and when the counting process has started, the game medals It is shown that the value of the number is starting to decrease.

The following timing (a5) is a timing when the count button 171 is kept pressed and the count sound is permitted. At this timing (a5), as shown in FIG. 99(a5), the display of FIG. 99(a3) continues, but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . Then, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (a6) is the timing when the count button 171 is released. At this timing (a6), the display of FIG. 99(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 99(a6). Further, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the output of the AT effect sound is resumed. Note that the text "Counting" in the frame at the top left of the screen has been erased.

The following timing (a7) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated. At this timing (a7), the background display of FIG. 99(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 99(a7). Also, the AT effect sound is being output.

In the above example, the operation at timing (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. In this operation, a configuration of the count notification A is shown in which the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Further, the operation at timings (a4) and (a5) corresponds to an example of count notification B. In this operation, a configuration of count notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is outputted in some cases.

Next, the example of FIG. 98(b) shows the timing (b1) when the AT state starts, and FIG. 100(b1) shows the situation at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during a game. As an example of this situation, FIG. 100 (b2) shows an example in which the operation navigation is displayed at the timing (b2) after the first stop operation. In addition, as shown in Figures 100 (b2) to (b8), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed in the upper left frame as a value of "possession", and the upper right frame is displayed in the AT state. It is assumed that the cumulative total of the number of game medals is displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the count button 171 is pressed and held for a period of time after the first stop operation is performed until immediately after the next game start operation. FIG. 98(b) shows the operation period of this count button 171. Timings (b3) to (b8) shown in FIG. 98(b) will be sequentially explained below.

First, timing (b3) is the timing when the count button 171 is operated after the first stop operation. At this timing (b3), the counting sound is not permitted, and as shown in FIG. 100(b3), the effect (including the AT effect sound) of FIG. 100(b2) continues. Then, when the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen to indicate that the counting process is being executed, and when the counting process has started, the game medals It is shown that the value of the number is starting to decrease.

The following timing (b4) is the timing after the third stop operation and when the count button 171 is continuously pressed. FIG. 100 (b4) shows that, at this timing (b4), the performance when winning a prize (here, the number of game medals is 8) is being executed. Note that at this timing (b4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the AT effect sound is output. Then, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the frame at the top left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b5) is a timing when the count button 171 is kept pressed and the count sound is permitted. At this timing (b5), as shown in Fig. 100 (b5), the display of Fig. 100 (b4) continues, but the AT effect sound is not output, and the counting sound is output. . Then, as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the upper left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b6) is the timing when the bet button 132 is operated while the counting button 171 is being held down for a long time. At this timing (b6), the display of FIG. 100(b4) continues as shown in FIG. 100(b6). In addition, when the bet button 132 is operated, the counting sound permission period ends, and the output of the AT performance sound resumes. Note that as the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the upper left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b7) is the timing after the start lever 135 is operated. At this timing (b7), the operation navigation is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (b7), and the AT effect sound is output. Note that when the counting button 171 is operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in the frame at the upper left of the screen, indicating that the value of the number of game medals is decreasing.

The following timing (b8) is the timing when the count button 171 is released. At this timing (b8), the display of FIG. 100(b7) continues as shown in FIG. 100(b8). Further, since the counting button 171 is not operated, the counting sound is not output, and the AT performance sound is output. Note that the text "Counting" in the upper frame on the left side of the screen has been erased.

In the above example, the operation at timing (b5) corresponds to an example of count notification A. In this operation, a configuration of the count notification A is shown in which the AT effect sound is not output during the counting process. Further, the operation at timings (b3) to (b5) corresponds to an example of count notification B. In this operation, a configuration of count notification B is shown in which the AT effect sound is maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is outputted in some cases.

[About display and presentation based on information from the medal number control unit]
In this embodiment, the game control unit 302 controls the game medals by a medal number control status command (see FIGS. 7 and 11) that is sent periodically (every 5.9 m8 ms in FIG. 7) from the medal number control unit 350. Information such as numbers can be grasped (Figure 25). Then, some of this information is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 by a security command (FIG. 7) that is sent periodically (every 100 ms in FIG. 7) from the game control unit 302. The first sub-control unit 400 can control various displays and effects based on this information. Furthermore, the player can grasp this information through these displays and effects.

In the above configuration, the time it takes to establish communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 when the power is turned on is the same as the time required for establishing communication between the game control unit 302 and the first sub-control unit 400 when the power is turned on. If it is later than the time until establishment, the security command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 even though the game control unit 302 has not yet received the medal number control status command from the medal number control unit 350. will be sent. The security command sent at this time does not reflect the information of the medal number control unit 350, so if various displays and performance controls are performed based on the information included in this security command, the actual state may differ. Information will be given to the player.

In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, a security command may be sent from the game control section 302 to the first sub-control section 400 after communication between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 is established. For example, the game control unit 302 may transmit the first security command after the power is turned on after receiving the medal number control state command. Further, the security command may be sent after providing a sufficient waiting time.

Further, until communication between the game control section 302 and the medal number control section 350 is established, even if the first sub-control section 400 receives a security command, it may not execute processing based on the security command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to ignore security commands received several times after the power is turned on, or to ignore security commands received until a certain waiting time elapses. good.

In addition, information indicating the communication status between the game control unit 302 and the number of medals control unit 350 is included in the security command, and the game control unit 302 receives the number of medals control status command (the number of medals control unit 350 and the number of medals control unit 302 When communication is established), information indicating that the communication is normal is included in the security command and sent, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes various displays and performance controls on the condition that this information is included. It may be possible to do so. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent information different from the actual state from being provided to the player.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the operation from the time the security command is sent until the next security command is sent. For example, if there is a change in information such as the number of game medals between security commands, if this information is not updated until the next security command is received, the latest information will not be reflected in various displays and performance controls. Put it away. In the game control unit 302, various processing commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in accordance with control related to the game (FIG. 7), but the latest information is included in these various processing commands, and this information is used to By controlling various displays and effects, it is possible to reflect the latest information.

<others>
In this embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game machine, but the invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as game media. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, Jankyu ball game machines, smart balls, etc. as media.

Note that a slot machine is a slot machine that operates on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game console) or computer by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration, and that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data equivalent to medals, and the game medium is input by inputting the computerized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Paying out game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the embodiment described above, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included within the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

≪Correspondence between structure of the invention and embodiments≫
Hereinafter, the configuration of the invention described in the above description will be described with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
If an operation is performed on the input operation means after transmitting the input operation information to the game value number control means and before receiving the response information, the game control means performs an operation based on the operation. (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until a response command is received; Sending commands, etc.))
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The insertion operation means includes a first insertion operation means (for example, 1 bet button 130) and a second insertion operation means different from the first insertion operation means (for example, MAX bet button 132),
The game control means is
Based on the fact that the first input operation means has been operated, the first input operation information (for example, an input command with a requested input number of 1 coin) is transmitted to the game value number control means as the input operation information. and send it to
Based on the fact that the second loading operation means has been operated, second loading operation information that is different from the first loading operation information (for example, if the requested number of sheets to be loaded is 3) is determined as the loading operation information. means for transmitting an input command) to the game value number control means;
The gaming value number control means is
Based on the reception of the first input operation information, a first game value update process is performed as the game value update process (for example, subtraction of the number of game medals from the requested number of coins to be inserted, one coin);
Based on the reception of the second input operation information, a second game value update process different from the first game value update process is performed as the game value update process (for example, the number of game medals for the requested number of inputs is 3). subtraction).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the receipt of the input operation information (for example, if the current number of bets reaches the maximum number of bets) , the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 19);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effects performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game control means is
Based on the fact that the response information is received within a predetermined period after transmitting the input operation information, predetermined game information is output to the production control means (for example, step S1114 in FIG. 17). ),
The means outputs the predetermined game information to the performance control means even if the response information is not received during the elapse of the predetermined period after transmitting the input operation information (for example, , in FIG. 17, if the response command is not received, the response command is considered abnormal and step S1114 is executed).
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (description of [operation of game control unit 302 due to input operation (transmission of input command, etc.)] reference),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
If an operation is performed on the input operation means after transmitting the input operation information to the game value number control means and before receiving the response information, the game control means performs an operation based on the operation. (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until a response command is received; Sending commands, etc.))
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
If an operation is performed on the input operation means after transmitting the input operation information to the game value number control means and before receiving the response information, the game control means performs an operation based on the operation. (For example, step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until a response command is received; Sending commands, etc.))
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34).
The gaming value number control means is
transmitting first response information (for example, other than re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received;
It is a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the inputting operation information is received. operation]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the gaming value number in order to transmit the gaming value number to the external processing device,
The gaming value number control means is
In the counting process, the number of game values to be transmitted to the external processing device is stored in the transmission buffer, and the game value update process is performed (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34);
In the counting process, when the number of game values is stored in the transmission buffer and the input operation information is received while the game value update process is being performed, the second response information is sent to the game control means. is a means of transmitting
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
In one counting process, the gaming value number control means stores a part of the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means in the transmission buffer, and extracts a part from the gaming value number. This is a means that may subtract the part of the number of game medals (for example, since the maximum number of medals counted at one time is 50 (step S4209 in FIG. 40), it may become a part of the number of game medals) ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the gaming value number control means receives the input operation information between the end of one counting process and the start of the next counting process, the gaming value number control means receives the first response information. to the game control means (for example, since the input prohibition flag is turned off, the response command is other than a re-request),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of retransmitting the input operation information transmitted immediately before to the game value number control means when the second response information is received (for example, (No determination in step S1310 in FIG. 19),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means does not perform the retransmission after the number of retransmissions reaches the upper limit (for example, No determination in step S1306 in FIG. 19), and the input operation means is operated. (For example, step S1113 in FIG. 17 is not executed because the response result is abnormal.)
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the receipt of the input operation information (for example, if the current number of bets is equal to the maximum number of bets) , the number of game medals is 0),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the first response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 19);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming medium management device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. ) is a viable means of
The gaming value number control means is
transmitting first response information (for example, other than re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received;
It is a means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the inputting operation information is received. operation]),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The gaming value number control means is
transmitting first response information (for example, other than re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed when the input operation information is received;
It is a means for transmitting second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the inputting operation information is received. operation]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
The gaming value number control means is
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is less than or equal to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the number of input requests from the number of game values is executed, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 to 57, the determination in step S4604 of FIG. 57 is Yes, the same value as the requested number of coins is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned in the response command),
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a means that may maintain the number of game values and transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 55 to 57 , No determination is made in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 57, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
If the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the input request number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55);
If the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 55, the input request is not executed). number is not inserted),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The input operation means includes a maximum number input operation means (for example, MAX bet button 132),
The game control means, based on the operation of the maximum number insertion operation means, generates maximum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command in which the maximum number of bets is the requested number of coins), which is the insertion operation information. Means capable of transmitting to the gaming value number control means,
The number of game values control means is a means for deriving the maximum number of game values that can be used in one game as the requested number of inputs based on the reception of the maximum number input operation information ([Modifications to the input operation example)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The input operation information may include predetermined information (for example, information on turning on a limited number of inputs flag),
The number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the input operation information includes the predetermined information. In this case, the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is transmitted to the game control means (for example, , a modification example of FIGS. 55 to 57, No determination in steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 57, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, and the input operation information does not include the predetermined information. In this case, the game value update process is executed to set the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means to 0, and the response information includes information indicating the number of game values before it becomes 0. to the game control means (for example, in the modified examples of FIGS. 55 to 57, No determination is made in step S4604 of FIG. 57, Yes determination is made in S4621, and the number of game medals is all subtracted. (becomes 0), the number of game medals before subtraction is returned in the response command as the subtraction amount),
The game control means is
When the response information including the information indicating the number of gaming values before reaching 0 is received, it is a means for performing an input process of inserting the gaming value of the number of gaming values (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
As the insertion operation means, there is a minimum number insertion operation means (for example, 1 bet button 130),
The game control means converts the minimum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command with a requested number of coins of 1), which is the insertion operation information, into the game value based on the operation performed on the minimum number insertion operation means. means capable of transmitting to a number control means;
The number of game values control means is a means for deriving the minimum number of game values that can be used in one game as the requested number of inputs based on the reception of the minimum number input operation information,
The minimum number insertion operation information does not include the predetermined information (for example, step S1122 in FIG. 55);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 19);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
The gaming value number control means is
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is less than or equal to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the number of input requests from the number of game values is executed, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 to 57, the determination in step S4604 of FIG. 57 is Yes, the same value as the requested number of coins is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned in the response command),
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a means that may maintain the number of game values and transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 55 to 57 , No determination is made in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 57, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
If the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the input request number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55);
If the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 55, the input request is not executed). number is not inserted),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 17). Steps S1110, S1111),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the input operation information, and performing the gaming value update process based on the input request number ( For example, step S4607 in FIG. 45),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45),
The gaming value number control means is
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is less than or equal to the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the number of input requests from the number of game values is executed, and the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 to 57, the determination in step S4604 of FIG. 57 is Yes, the same value as the requested number of coins is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned in the response command),
If the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means, the number of input requests is stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a means that may maintain the number of game values and transmit the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of FIGS. 55 to 57 , No determination is made in both steps S4604 and S4621 in FIG. 57, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command),
The game control means is
If the response information including information indicating that the number of input requests has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming value of the input request number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55);
If the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 in FIG. 55, the input request is not executed). number is not inserted),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (e.g., payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, the method shown in FIG. 18). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34).
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information may be subjected to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time onwards. Become),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are performed continuously in accordance with the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the gaming value number control means controls the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information and the game value number storage. The means may total the number of game values stored in the means and subject it to the second counting process,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means may not add the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means based on the reception of the settlement operation information (for example, when the current number of bets is 0). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4705 in FIG. 46),
The game control means is means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 19);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (e.g., payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, the method shown in FIG. 18). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the game media management device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information may be subjected to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time onwards. Become),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (e.g., payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, the method shown in FIG. 18). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payment operation information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payment number derived based on the reception of the payment operation information may be subjected to the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is to be counted from the next time onwards. Become),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (for example, , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34).
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example, , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted in the next and subsequent counting processes). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first counting process and the second counting process are performed continuously in accordance with the communication cycle,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the gaming value number control means stores the payout number derived based on reception of the payout information and the gaming value number storage means. means for summing up the stored number of game values and subjecting it to the second counting process;
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with effect control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effects performed by the effect means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The game value number control means is means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4B05 in FIG. 50),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the response information indicating that the game value update process based on the reception of the payout information has been successfully completed. For example, step S1607 in FIG. 22),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see [Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the game media management device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. ) is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example, , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted in the next and subsequent counting processes). ,
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The counting process may be executed in accordance with a communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device,
The game value number control means is configured to control the number of game values when a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next communication cycle after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during execution of the first counting process, the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information may be subject to the second counting process (for example, , the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is to be counted in the next and subsequent counting processes). ,
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means derives the number of lending out gaming values based on reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server), and updates the gaming value based on the number of lending out. A means capable of performing processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a first value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of loans to (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 39);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the first value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 39, see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a second value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of payouts to (for example, Yes determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 50),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means exceeds the second value, the number of game value control means controls the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, No determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 50),
The second value is a value larger than the first value (for example, step S4B03 in FIG. 50, step S4107 in FIG. 39),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value update process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is means having a transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means stores the response information in the transmission buffer, and transmits the response information. After the transmission buffer is cleared with the transmission of the number to the external processing device, it is possible to execute the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means. (for example, a Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 36),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means updates the communication number with the external processing device (for example, , Yes determination in step S3703 of FIG. 36, step S3706), means for transmitting the response information including first information (for example, the loan serial number received this time) to the external processing device,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means exceeds the first value, the number of game values control means (without updating the communication number with the external processing device) For example, if the determination in step S3703 in FIG. Loan receipt result response (periodic transmission from medal number control unit 350 to lending machine 700));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device one time before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the gaming media management device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a first value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of loans to (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 39);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the first value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 39, see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means when the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means does not exceed a first value. means that can execute the game value update process of adding the number of loans to (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 39);
When the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means exceeds the first value, the gaming value number control means controls the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, the determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 39, see [Rental notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means derives the number of lending out gaming values based on reception of lending information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server), and updates the gaming value based on the number of lending out. A means capable of performing processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value update process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game value number control means Means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the value number storage means (for example, Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 36);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The gaming value number control means is means having a second transmission buffer that temporarily stores the gaming value number in order to transmit the gaming value number to the external processing device,
The gaming value number control means is a means for storing the gaming value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the second transmission buffer and also performing the gaming value updating process (for example, the gaming value number control means in FIG. 34 Steps S3513, S3514),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means does not exceed a predetermined value (for example, a Yes determination in step S4107 in FIG. 39), the number of game value control means controls the external processing. The communication number with the device is updated (for example, a Yes determination in step S3703 in FIG. 36, step S3706), and the response information including the first information (for example, the rental serial number received this time) is sent to the external processing device. means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loaned number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, step S3714 in FIG. 36);
If the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means exceeds the predetermined value (for example, a determination of No in step S4107 in FIG. 39), the number of game value control means controls the external The response information including the second information (for example, the lending serial number received last time) is sent without updating the communication number with the processing device (for example, a No determination is made in step S3703 in FIG. 36, and step S3706 is not executed). Means for transmitting to the external processing device and maintaining the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, No determination in step S3712 of FIG. 36, S3714 is not executed),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device one time before the latest communication number,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the gaming media management device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the gaming media management device when performing the gaming value updating process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the gaming media management device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the game media management device, the means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 36);
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The gaming value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the gaming value update process based on reception of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35),
The gaming value number control means is means having a first transmission buffer that temporarily stores the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device,
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared as the response information is transmitted to the external processing device, the game value number control means Means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the value number storage means (for example, Yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 36);
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. is a means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the number of gaming values is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with performance means (for example, performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined performance (for example, FIG. 63),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means controls the counting when a power outage occurs while the counting promotion state is set and the operating means is in the predetermined operating state after the power is restored. It is a means that can set a promotion state (for example, FIG. 68(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is a means for not transmitting the gaming value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, No determination in step S4211 of FIG. 40, clearing of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the number of gaming values is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40). ) can be sent to the gaming media management device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) as the number of game values is sent to the game media management device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent repeatedly,
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the number of gaming values is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 58). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 58);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is removed,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 58) that is larger than the first value as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
The second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 67);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The degree of increase in the second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operation state (FIG. 67);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means controls the counting when a power outage occurs while the counting promotion state is set and the operating means is in the predetermined operating state after the power is restored. This is a means that can set the promotion state and maximize the degree of increase (FIG. 68(b)).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is transmitted as the number of gaming values to the external processing device, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with performance means (for example, performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined performance (for example, FIG. 63),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the number of gaming values stored by the number of gaming values storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, the number of gaming values controlling means controls the number of gaming values stored by the number of gaming values storage means. is means for reducing the degree of increase in the second value compared to the case where the second value exceeds the predetermined value (FIG. 68(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 58). ) can be sent to the gaming media management device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 58);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 58) as the number of game values is sent to the game media management device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent repeatedly,
The second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 67);
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 58). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 58);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is removed,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 58) that is larger than the first value as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
The second value may increase depending on the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 67);
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. is a means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operating means entered the predetermined operating state, the first value ( For example, 1. Step S4212 in FIG. 59) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the first time period elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step 59 in FIG. 59) is set as the gaming value number. S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
The means is capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time period (for example, 2 seconds) that is longer than the first time period elapses while the operation means remains in the predetermined operation state (for example, Step S4234 in FIG. 59),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value as the number of gaming values is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). (For example, Yes is determined in step S4235 in FIG. 59, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 69),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising notification means (for example, effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for making a predetermined notification when the automatic counting state is set (FIGS. 71 and 72);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with performance means (for example, performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined performance (for example, FIG. 63),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
If a power outage occurs while the automatic counting state is set and the operating means is in the predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means controls the automatic counting state. It is a means that can set the counting state (for example, FIG. 70(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is a means for not setting the automatic counting state when the gaming value number stored by the gaming value number storage means is smaller than a predetermined value (FIG. 70(a)). ,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operating means entered the predetermined operating state, the first value ( For example, 1. Step S4212 in FIG. 59) can be sent to the gaming media management device,
If the first time period elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step 59 in FIG. 59) is set as the gaming value number. S4209) can be sent to the gaming media management device,
The means is capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time period (for example, 2 seconds) that is longer than the first time period elapses while the operation means remains in the predetermined operation state (for example, Step S4234 in FIG. 59),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value as the number of gaming values is repeatedly transmitted to the gaming media management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, Yes is determined in step S4235 in FIG. 59, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 69),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operating means entered the predetermined operating state, the first value ( For example, 1. Step S4212 of FIG. 59) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the first time period elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step 59 in FIG. 59) is set as the gaming value number. S4209) can be sent to the external processing device,
The means is capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time period (for example, 2 seconds) that is longer than the first time period elapses while the operation means remains in the predetermined operation state (for example, Step S4234 in FIG. 59),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value as the number of gaming values is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). (For example, Yes is determined in step S4235 in FIG. 59, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 69),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and controls the game value number based on the operation performed on the operation means. means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
If a power outage occurs and the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means determines the predetermined operating state as a valid operating state and controls the gaming value number control means. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 73(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step 40 in FIG. 40). S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is removed,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
If the operating means has been in the predetermined operating state since a power outage occurred and the power was restored, the gaming value number control means is configured to be in the predetermined operating state before the power outage. means for determining the number of game values to be transmitted to the external processing device based on the time in which the predetermined operation state is in the predetermined operation state after power restoration, regardless of the time (FIG. 73(a));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time has elapsed after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the number of gaming values is set to the first value (for example, 1, step 40 in FIG. 40). S4212) can be sent to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is eliminated,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) as the number of game values is repeatedly sent to the external processing device at a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms). sent,
The game value number control means is a means that can set the counting promotion state when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after a power outage occurs and the power is restored. 73(a)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the first value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value is sent to the external processing device as the number of gaming values, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with performance means (for example, performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined performance (for example, FIG. 63),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the gaming media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
If a power outage occurs and the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means determines the predetermined operating state as a valid operating state and controls the gaming value number control means. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 73(a)),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
An operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is an executable means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
If a power outage occurs and the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when the power is restored, the gaming value number control means determines the predetermined operating state as a valid operating state and controls the gaming value number control means. A means capable of executing update processing (for example, FIG. 73(a)),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, a number of game medal display device 170, a performance image display device 157),
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a change that changes the displayed value in stages from a pre-update value to a post-update value when the play value number stored in the play value number storage means is updated. (e.g., FIGS. 76 to 80),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The counting process is a process executed according to a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms),
The display means is means for displaying the change in a time shorter than the predetermined period (FIGS. 76 and 77),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation on the operation means,
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a predetermined time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, the gaming value number is set to a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40). ) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
If the predetermined time elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40);
The counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is canceled when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is removed,
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) as the number of game values is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined period;
The gaming value number control means is a means for not transmitting the gaming value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is canceled after setting the counting promotion state (for example, No determination in step S4211 of FIG. 40, clearing of the scheduled number of sheets to be counted),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, the number of game medal display device 170, the effect image display device 157);
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a change that changes the display value in stages from a pre-update value to a post-update value when the play value number stored in the play value number storage means is updated. (e.g., FIGS. 76 to 80),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, a number of game medal display device 170, a performance image display device 157),
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a change that changes the displayed value in stages from a pre-update value to a post-update value when the play value number stored in the play value number storage means is updated. (for example, FIGS. 76 to 80),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game, and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, as shown in FIG. step S101),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. (For example, step S3005 in FIG. 28),
The game control means is a means for not clearing the game value information storage means when the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means clears at least a portion of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. (for example, a Yes determination in step S3016 of FIG. 28),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
An abnormality in the game control means is notified with priority over an abnormality in the game value information control means (see [Operation in response to error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value information control means is a means for transmitting information to the gaming control means at a predetermined period (for example, transmitting one command with 8 interruptions (0.745 ms x 8)),
The game control means is means for determining a communication abnormality with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, in FIG. Section 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operation for errors (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means controls the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, No determination in step S3007 in FIG. 28, step S4407 in FIG. 42, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, as shown in FIG. step S101),
The gaming value information control means is means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. (For example, step S3005 in FIG. 28),
The game control means is a means for not clearing the game value information storage means when the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means clears at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. (for example, a Yes determination in step S3016 of FIG. 28),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game, and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, as shown in FIG. step S101),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. (For example, step S3005 in FIG. 28),
The game control means is a means for not clearing the game value information storage means when the game value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if it receives an error from the medal number control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means clears at least a portion of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. (for example, a Yes determination in step S3016 of FIG. 28),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game, and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
An abnormality in the game control means is notified with priority over an abnormality in the game value information control means (see [Operation in response to error (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for determining a communication abnormality with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 24),
The abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operations for errors (game control unit 302)]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When determining that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means controls the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, No determination in step S3007 in FIG. 28, step S4407 in FIG. 42, initialization of chip information),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game, and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information regarding the state of the game, and controls the progress of the game;
Gaming value information comprising a gaming value information storage means (for example, RAM 358) for storing gaming value information regarding gaming values used in games, and updating the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means. A control means (for example, medal number control unit 350),
A game machine comprising:
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming control means may execute processing for the abnormality. means (see [Operation in response to error (gaming control unit 302)]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming value control unit and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
When the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received, the number of gaming values controlling means transmits predetermined information to the gaming value controlling means. (For example, if the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 50, the response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 22),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in FIG. )〕reference),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of disabling the game from proceeding when the predetermined information is received (for example, a No determination is made in step S1606 in FIG. 22 and the process is repeated, [game control by payout)] Operation of the unit 302 (transmission of payout command, etc.)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) and the game value number based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting the number (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34);
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The predetermined performance is a performance that flashes a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 81(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming value control unit and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
When the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received, the number of gaming values controlling means transmits predetermined information to the gaming value controlling means. (For example, if the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 50, the response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the production control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 22),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in FIG. )〕reference),
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (e.g., medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming value control unit and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
When the number of gaming values stored in the number of gaming values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when the payout information is received, the number of gaming values controlling means transmits predetermined information to the gaming value controlling means. (For example, if the determination is No in step S4B03 of FIG. 50, the response command is set to "abnormal"),
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 22),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in FIG. )〕reference),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
A gaming value number control means (e.g., , medal number control unit 350),
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If the limit exceeds the limit, an error will occur when borrowing exceeds the limit).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of causing the performance means to perform a demonstration performance when a game is not being executed,
The predetermined performance is a performance that is performed even when the demo performance is being performed (for example, FIG. 84(a));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The predetermined performance is a performance that flashes a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 81(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that communicates bidirectionally with the gaming media management device and performs a gaming value update process for updating the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit; ,
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the gaming media management device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the lending information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If the limit exceeds the limit, an error will occur when borrowing exceeds the limit).
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game control means (for example, game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process that bidirectionally communicates with the external processing device and updates the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A production control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the game control means and controls the production performed by the production means (for example, the production image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420). )and,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the lending number of the gaming value based on reception of lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value updating process based on the lending number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
When the number of game values stored in the number of game values storage means exceeds a predetermined value when receiving the rental information, the number of game values control means transmits predetermined information to the game value control means. is a means of transmitting
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. If the limit exceeds the limit, an error will occur when borrowing exceeds the limit).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game machine comprising a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs bidirectional communication with an external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a host server) and advances the game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the gaming value based on receiving lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value update process based on the loan number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the external processing device from the status of a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game from proceeding if it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, No determination in step S1007 of FIG. 16);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A production control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the main control means and controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). ),
The effect control means is a means that does not notify the communication abnormality in the effect means when it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, does not perform error notification for VL signal abnormality);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A production control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that has one-way communication with the main control means and controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420). ),
Equipped with counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
The main control means executes a process of transmitting the number of game values to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the counting operation means. is a possible means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34),
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background,
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform an effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 81(b)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) connected to a game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
The gaming machine is
A game machine comprising a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs bidirectional communication with the game media management device and advances the game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the game value based on receiving the loan information from the game media management device, and performing the game value update process based on the loan number. (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the gaming media management device from the status of a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the gaming media management device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game if it is determined that the communication is abnormal (e.g., No determination in step S1007 of FIG. 16);
A game media management device is described.

Also,
A game machine (for example, slot machine 100),
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) configured to include at least
The gaming machine is
A game machine comprising a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs bidirectional communication with the external processing device and advances the game,
The main control means is means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the gaming value based on receiving lending information from the external processing device and performing the gaming value update process based on the loan number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the external processing device from the status of a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of disabling the game from proceeding if it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, No determination in step S1007 of FIG. 16);
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A counting operation means (for example, counting button 171),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The gaming value number control means performs a counting process (e.g., including a process of transmitting the gaming value number to an external processing device and a gaming value updating process of subtracting the gaming value number) based on the operation of the counting operation unit. , steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34).
The game control means is a means that can set a first game state (for example, AT state) in which auxiliary functions that are advantageous to the player can be operated;
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the counting operation means even in the first gaming state,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing a counting effect (for example, FIG. 63) in conjunction with the counting process,
The amount of increase in the number of game values per unit game in the first gaming state when the game is played according to the activated auxiliary function is greater than the amount of decrease in the number of game values per unit game due to the counting process. Small (In the description of [About the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing], the amount of increase in the number of gaming medals per unit game in an advantageous gaming state is smaller than the amount of decrease in the number of gaming medals per unit game due to counting processing) ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The above-mentioned counting effect is an effect with a termination condition that is different from the end of the above-mentioned counting process. (see configuration that may terminate),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The production control means is a means capable of executing a specific production,
The performance control means is a means for not executing the specific performance while the counting performance is being executed.
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which a performance that requires some kind of operation is not performed in the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The specific performance is a performance that requires an operation from the player;
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which a performance that requires some kind of operation is not executed in the description of [Concerning the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The counting performance is a performance whose content changes depending on the amount of subtraction of the number of gaming values by the counting process,
A gaming machine characterized by this (see the configuration in which the content of the counting effect changes according to the amount of game medals counted in the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]) is described. There is.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for restarting the immediately preceding counting performance from the middle when a new counting process is started within a predetermined time after the counting process is terminated halfway due to the completion of the counting process. is,
A gaming machine characterized by the following (during the description of [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]), even after the counting performance ends midway, the immediately preceding counting performance (counting performance that ended midway) ) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means continues the counting performance within a predetermined time after the counting process ends, and if a new counting process is started while the counting process continues, the performance control means controls the counting performance to continue. It is a means of continuous execution,
A game machine characterized by the following (during the description of [Concerning the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]), the counting effect continues even after the counting process ends, and when a new counting process starts, the counting effect that is being executed (see the configuration to keep it as is), is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the number of bets;
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game control means is a means for transmitting first information regarding payment (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The gaming value number control means derives the number of settled gaming values based on the reception of the first information, performs the gaming value updating process based on the settled number, and then controls the number of gaming values for the first information. Means for not transmitting response information to the game control means,
The game control means is means that can set the number of bets to 0 based on the operation of the payment operation means.
A game machine (see configuration that does not wait for a response command to a payment command (response command not used)) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting second information regarding the input (for example, an input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the input operation means,
The gaming value number control means derives the number of gaming value input requests based on the reception of the second information, performs the gaming value update process based on the input request number, and then Means capable of transmitting response information to the information to the game control means,
The game control means is means capable of setting the number of bets based on reception of response information to the second information.
A game machine (for input commands, refer to a configuration using response commands) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. , and then transmits the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device. (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals in),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. , and then transmits the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device. (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals in),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is configured to control, with respect to the increase in the gaming value number while the counting process continues, after the state where the counting process ends before the gaming value number becomes 0. (Refer to the operation when the counting button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 18). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The increase is based on the number of settlements (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (in the description of [Configuration related to payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. It is a means for transmitting the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device after transmitting the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device. (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals)
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the gaming value number for each fixed number to the external processing device at periodically visited transmission timings (for example, transmitting the number of gaming medals by counting processing (count notification). ) is every 300ms, Figure 5),
When the gaming value number control means ends the transmission of the gaming value number excluding the increased gaming value number at the current transmission timing of the transmission timing, the gaming value number control means controls the number of gaming values at the next transmission timing of the transmission timing. It is means for transmitting the increased number of game values at the transmission timing (in FIGS. 91(c) and 91(e), after the transmission of 120 game medals during counting processing is completed, the increased number of game values is transmitted at the transmission timing. will be sent),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is configured to control, with respect to the increase in the number of gaming values while the counting process continues, after the state where the counting process ends before the number of gaming values becomes 0. (Refer to the operation when the counting button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (for example, a payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, as shown in FIG. 18). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The increase is based on the number of settlements (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Display means capable of displaying the number of game values stored in the number of game value storage means (for example, effect image display device 157, number of game medals display device 170);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
If there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process continues, the number of game values control means controls the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device. It is a means for transmitting the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device after transmitting the increased number of gaming values to the external processing device. (Refer to the composition for the increase in the number of game medals)
The display means is a means capable of performing a subtraction display that subtracts the number of game values in accordance with the number of game values subtracted by the counting process,
The display means is means that can execute the subtraction display that reflects the increase when there is an increase in the number of gaming values while the counting process continues (FIG. 91(d)) f)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is configured to control, with respect to the increase in the gaming value number while the counting process continues, after the state where the counting process ends before the gaming value number becomes 0. (Refer to the operation when the counting button 171 is released before the number of game medals reaches 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process]).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment operation information (e.g., payment command) to the game value number control means based on the operation performed on the payment operation means (for example, the method shown in FIG. 18). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the gaming value based on the receipt of the settlement operation information and performing the gaming value update process based on the settlement number (for example, Step S4704 in FIG. 46),
The increase is based on the number of settlements (in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is means for transmitting payout information (for example, payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22). ,
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the gaming value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the gaming value update process based on the payout number (for example, as shown in FIG. 49, step S4B04 in FIG. 50),
The increase is based on the number of payouts (in the description of [Configuration related to payout and settlement operations during counting process], the increase in the number of game medals refers to either payout or settlement operations). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the number of bets;
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The insertion operation means includes a predetermined insertion operation means (for example, bet button 130) that can set the minimum value of the number of bets,
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement information (for example, a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the operation of the settlement operation means,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the operation of the predetermined input operation means when the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and that can transmit information on the difference between the different values and the minimum value to the gaming value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on reception of the settlement information.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means calculates a value obtained by subtracting the minimum value from the maximum value based on the fact that the predetermined input operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value. means for transmitting the settlement information including the payment information to the game value number control means;
A gaming machine is described (see description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]), which is characterized by the following.

Further, the game machine described above,
including audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
The audio output means is a means for outputting a payment sound based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The audio output means is a means for outputting a charging sound based on the operation of the charging operation means,
The audio output means is a means for outputting the making sound based on the fact that the predetermined placing operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine ((refer to the description of [Regarding the setting to reduce the number of bets by operating the bet button])) is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the number of bets;
A payment operation means (for example, payment button 134),
audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The insertion operation means includes a predetermined insertion operation means (for example, bet button 130) that can set the minimum value of the number of bets,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payment information to the game value number control means based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The game control means sets the minimum value to the number of bets based on the operation of the predetermined input operation means when the number of bets is set to a value different from the minimum value. means that can be set and that can transmit information on the difference between the different values and the minimum value to the gaming value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on reception of the settlement information,
The audio output means is a means for outputting a payment sound based on the operation of the payment operation means,
The audio output means is means that does not output the settlement sound when the predetermined insertion operation means is operated while the bet number is set to a value different from the minimum value. ,
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The audio output means is a means for outputting a charging sound based on the operation of the charging operation means,
The audio output means is a means for outputting the making sound based on the fact that the predetermined placing operation means is operated while the number of bets is set to the maximum value.
A game machine (see the description of [Regarding the setting for reducing the number of bets by operating the bet button]) is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information to the gaming control means when receiving external information regarding gaming values managed by the external processing device,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the production control means,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance according to a determination target in a certain gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is the sum of the number included in the external information and the gaming value number;
A game machine characterized by this (see the configuration in which the total value of the number of game medals and the number of held medals is the subject of determination in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals]) is described.

Also,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The gaming value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information to the gaming control means when receiving external information regarding gaming values managed by the external processing device,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the production control means,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance according to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to the player,
The determination target is a number included in the external information,
A gaming machine characterized by this (see the configuration in which the number of held medals is the subject of determination in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The number included in the external information is the number of game values acquired in the game stored (for example, the number of medals held is the number of game values acquired in the game stored),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means executes a first performance when the number of judgment targets has not reached the predetermined number, and executes a second performance based on the fact that the number of judgment targets has reached the predetermined number. (Refer to the configuration that executes different effects depending on the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding effects according to the number of game medals]),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of displaying information regarding the determination target at least in the certain game state (during the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals], the value to be determined is displayed) (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing, in the certain game state, a performance according to the number of game values acquired in the certain game state (in the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals], (See the configuration that executes a performance using the number of medals you have and a performance using the number of acquired medals in parallel),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
In the certain gaming state, there are cases where the number of gaming values acquired in the certain gaming state exceeds the number included in the external information. If the counting process is not carried out under favorable conditions, the number of medals earned may exceed the number of medals held).
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a setting suggestion performance according to the determination target ("When the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number" in [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals]), ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Inserting operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process of updating the game value number based on reception of information from an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server). (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 38, step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The performance control means is a means that can display the number of game values in a certain gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the value of "possession" in FIG. 93),
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance in the certain gaming state according to the number of gaming values acquired in the certain gaming state.
A game machine characterized by this (in the description of [Regarding performance according to the number of game medals], a configuration in which the number of acquired medals in the AT state is the subject of determination, see FIG. 93) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of displaying the number of acquired gaming values in the certain gaming state (for example, the value of "...GET" in FIG. 93),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for updating and displaying both the display of the number of acquisitions and the display of the number of game values when a game value is acquired in the certain gaming state (for example, in FIG. 93 (d2) (d3)),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is a means that can execute a performance according to the number of game values in the certain gaming state (during the description of [Regarding the performance according to the number of game medals], it is possible to execute performances in parallel). (see configuration),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a first operating means (for example, reset button R);
a second operation means (for example, counting button 171);
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The first operating means is an operating means capable of canceling a first error regarding the game control means,
The second operating means is an operating means capable of canceling a second error regarding the number of game value control means,
If the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes reversible and the second error becomes unresolvable.
A game machine (see description of [Regarding operations when errors overlap], FIG. 96) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 95),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process (see FIG. 94),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 94);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, execute the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 94);
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error has occurred (see FIG. 96);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is the same operating means as the second operating means,
(Refer to the configuration in which the error canceling operation means for canceling the game control error and the medal number control error are the same in the description of [Regarding the operation when errors overlap]), which is characterized by the following: There is.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, rental machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
a first operating means (for example, reset button R);
a second operation means (for example, counting button 171);
Notification means (for example, effect image display device 157),
a game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The first operating means is an operating means capable of canceling a first error regarding the game control means,
The second operating means is an operating means capable of canceling a second error regarding the number of game value control means,
If the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes the first state which is reversible and the second error is not reversible. ,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a first error notification regarding the first error in the first state.
A game machine (see description of [Regarding operations when errors overlap], FIG. 96) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means that can issue a notification prompting cancellation of the first error based on the operation of the second operation means in the first state (see FIG. 96(d4)). ),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a second error notification regarding the second error (see FIG. 96(d2));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for interrupting the second error notification being executed when executing the first error notification in the first state (see FIGS. 96(d2) and (d3)),
The notification means is a means for starting the second error notification when the first state ends due to cancellation of the first error (see FIGS. 96(d4) to (d6));
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The notification means is a means for continuously executing the second error notification when executing the first error notification in the first state (in the description of [About operations when errors overlap]), (see configuration to display messages about both errors),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The second error is an error that can be canceled by executing the counting process,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means,
A gaming machine (see FIGS. 94(b2) to (b4)) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 95),
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming value number control means is
If the first error has not occurred, execute the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 94);
means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error has occurred (see FIG. 96);
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A game system (for example, a game system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means that can set a first game state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player,
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an effect sound in the AT state) in the first gaming state,
The audio output means is a means that may reduce the volume of the first performance sound when the counting process is executed in the first gaming state.
A gaming machine (see [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (1)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The sound output means may reduce the volume of the first performance sound when the counting process is executed with all of the plurality of reels stopped in the first gaming state. is a means,
A game machine characterized by the following (refer to the configuration in which counting notification A is executed with all reels stopped in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (1)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The voice output means is configured to output the voice output means when the counting process is being executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after all the stop operations for the plurality of rotating reels have been performed in the first gaming state. It is a means that may reduce the volume of the first performance sound,
A game machine characterized by the following (during the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (1)], a predetermined period of time has passed since the last stop operation was performed on the reels, and all reels have stopped rotating) (Refer to the configuration for executing count notification A under the condition of .) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a second performance sound (for example, a counting sound) when the counting process is being executed.
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
The audio output means is a means for returning the volume of the first effect sound based on the operation of the predetermined operation means in a state where the volume of the first effect sound has decreased.
There is described a game machine characterized by the following (refer to the configuration in which the counting notification A that is being executed is terminated when an operation on some operating means is triggered in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (1)]).

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) including the audio output means,
Equipped with
The game control means is a means that can set a second game state (for example, a normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state,
The production means is a means capable of performing demonstration production,
The presentation means is a means for not performing a demonstration presentation when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the first gaming state,
The production means is a means capable of executing a demonstration production when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the second gaming state.
A game machine characterized by the following (in the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (1)]), a so-called demonstration performance is not performed in a state that is advantageous to the player, and a demonstration performance is performed in a state that is disadvantageous to the player. , see the description).

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
audio output means (for example, speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34), including a process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and a process of updating the game value to subtract the number of game values. is a viable means,
The game control means is a means that can set a first game state (for example, AT state) that is advantageous to the player,
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an effect sound in the AT state) in the first gaming state,
The audio output means is a means capable of outputting a second effect sound (for example, a counting sound) when the counting process is being executed,
The audio output means is a means that may maintain a state in which the first performance sound is output when the counting process is executed in the first gaming state.
A game machine (see [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means may output the second effect sound when the counting process is executed with all the plurality of reels stopped in the first gaming state. be,
A gaming machine is described (see the configuration in which counting notification B is executed in a state where all reels are stopped in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]), which is characterized by the following.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means is a means that does not output the second effect sound when any of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state.
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which counting notification B is not executed while any reel is rotating in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
Equipped with
The audio output means is a means that does not output the second performance sound from the time the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until the plurality of reels start rotating.
A gaming machine characterized by this (refer to the configuration in which counting notification B is not executed after some operation means is performed in the description of [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means outputs the second effect sound in a first mode when the counting process is executed while all the plurality of reels in the first gaming state are stopped. There are cases where
(In the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)], the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output is the case where the counting notification B is executed, and the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is not executed is the case where the counting notification B is not executed. In the case where the counting sound of the second aspect is output, the following configurations are described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
After the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, a stop control means (for example, the game control unit 302 )and,
Equipped with
The audio output means outputs the second performance sound in a second manner when the counting process is executed while any of the plurality of reels is rotating in the first gaming state. It is a means of outputting
(In the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)], the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output is the case where the counting notification B is executed, and the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is not executed is the case where the counting notification B is not executed. In the case where the counting sound of the second aspect is output, the following configurations are described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Predetermined operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
Equipped with
The audio output means is configured to output the second sound output when the counting process is being executed after the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until the plurality of reels start rotating. means for outputting the performance sound in a second mode,
(In the description of [Regarding Notification of Counting Process (2)], the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is output is the case where the counting notification B is executed, and the case where the counting sound of the first aspect is not executed is the case where the counting notification B is not executed. In the case where the counting sound of the second aspect is output, the following configurations are described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130, 132),
A game control means (for example, game control section 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation performed on the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores the number of game values related to the game value used in the game;
a gaming value number control unit (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a gaming value update process to update the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage unit;
Production control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) that controls production performed by production means (for example, production image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means is means for transmitting information on the game value number to the game control means,
The game control means is a means for transmitting a command (for example, a security command) containing information on the number of game values received from the number of game value control means to the production control means,
The performance control means is means for executing first control regarding the number of gaming values based on receiving the command;
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication is established between the game control means and the number of game value control means,
The performance control means is a means that does not execute the first control even if it receives the command until communication is established between the game control means and the game value number control means.
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication is established between the game control means and the number of game value control means,
The command includes information indicating whether communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal,
The performance control means is means that does not execute the first control even if the command is received until information indicating that communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal is received. be,
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The performance control means is means for executing the first control based on the communication between the game control means and the game value number control means being normal;
A game machine (see [Regarding display and performance based on information of medal number control unit]) characterized by the following is described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting the command to the production control means at a predetermined period (for example, a security command is sent at a period of 100 ms),
The game control means transmits various processing commands (for example, the various processing commands in FIG. 5) including the information on the number of game values received from the game value number control means to the production control means in accordance with the progress of the game. It is a means to
The effect control means is means for executing the first control based on receiving the various processing commands,
A game machine characterized by the following is described.

Also,
A game media management device (for example, lending machine 700) characterized in that it is connected to the game machine described above is described.

Also,
The game machine described above,
an external processing device (for example, lending machine 700, host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, gaming system S) characterized in that it is configured to include at least the following is described.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Display window 130, 132 Bet button 134 Settlement button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Effect image display device 171 Count button 272, 277 Speaker 420 Various lamps 302 Game control section 350 Number of medals control section 400 First sub-control unit 500 Second sub-control unit 700 Rental machine 707 Rental button 800 Hall management terminal 810 Intermediate management terminal 820 Management server

Claims (1)

operating means,
a game value number storage means for storing a game value number related to the game value used in the game;
a game value number control means that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A game machine comprising:
The game value number control means executes the process of transmitting the number of game values to an external processing device and the game value update process of subtracting the number of game values based on the operation performed on the operation means. is a possible means,
The gaming value number control means is
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before a first time elapses after the operating means enters the predetermined operating state, a first value can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of gaming values. ,
If the first time period has elapsed while the operating means remained in the predetermined operating state, the external processing repeats a second value larger than the first value as the number of gaming values at a predetermined cycle. can be sent to the device,
means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time period, which is longer than the first time period, elapses while the operating means remains in the predetermined operating state;
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined period as the number of gaming values;
The length of time obtained by subtracting the first time from the second time is at least three times the length of the first time.
A game machine characterized by:

Images